WO2021215227A1 - Ue (user equipment) - Google Patents

Ue (user equipment) Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021215227A1
WO2021215227A1 PCT/JP2021/014443 JP2021014443W WO2021215227A1 WO 2021215227 A1 WO2021215227 A1 WO 2021215227A1 JP 2021014443 W JP2021014443 W JP 2021014443W WO 2021215227 A1 WO2021215227 A1 WO 2021215227A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
nssai
plmn
information
network
procedure
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/014443
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
周一郎 千葉
靖夫 菅原
陽子 久下
雄大 河崎
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Priority to JP2022516932A priority Critical patent/JPWO2021215227A1/ja
Publication of WO2021215227A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021215227A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/16Discovering, processing access restriction or access information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to UE (User Equipment).
  • UE User Equipment
  • the present application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-077041 filed in Japan on April 24, 2020, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • SAE System Architecture Evolution
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G Next-generation mobile communication systems
  • 5GS 5th Generation
  • 5G System 5G System
  • 3GPP TS 23.501 V16.4.0 (2020-03); 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; System Architecture for the 5G System; Stage 2 (Release 16) 3GPP TS 23.502 V16.4.0 (2020-03); 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; Procedures for the 5G System; Stage 2 (Release 16) 3GPP TS 24.501 V16.4.1 (2020-03); 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Core Network and Terminals; Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) protocol for 5G System (5GS); Stage 3 (Release 16) 3GPP TS 23.122 V16.5.0 (2020-03); 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Core Network and Terminals; Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) functions related to Mobile Station (MS) in idle mode (Release 16) 3GPP TR 23.700-40 V0.3.0 (2020-01); 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects
  • 5G Core Network 5G Core Network
  • 5G defines network slices, which are logical networks that provide specific network functions and specific network characteristics for specific service types and specific groups.
  • the network slice may be a logical network provided for a terminal having a low latency function, or may be a logical network provided for a sensor terminal used for IoT (Internet of Things). good.
  • eNS Evolution of Network Slicing
  • 3GPP considers Phase 2 of the eNS as a feature for selecting the appropriate destination mobile network (VPLMN) in consideration of the slice support that the UE used in the home mobile network (HPLMN) at the destination. Considering addition (see Non-Patent Document 5).
  • One aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is to provide a method for realizing a function for eNS in 5GS.
  • the UE User Equipment
  • the UE includes a transmission / reception unit, a control unit, and a storage unit
  • the transmission / reception unit is the first PLMN (Public Land Mobile Networks) in the first PLMN.
  • Registration acceptance message containing the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) permitted to be used in the first S-NSSAI and the second PLMN ID indicating the second PLMN associated with the first S-NSSAI.
  • the storage unit stores the second PLMN ID in association with the first S-NSSAI
  • the control unit associates the first S-NSSAI with the first S-NSSAI.
  • the second PLMN can be selected based on the second PLMN ID
  • the control unit transitions to the registration state based on the reception of the registration acceptance message
  • the transmission / reception unit sends the registration acceptance message.
  • the first S-NSSAI permitted to be used in the first PLMN and the third PLMN associated with the first S-NSSAI are shown.
  • the storage unit stores the third PLMN ID and the first S-NSSAI in association with each other, and the control unit stores the first S.
  • -It is characterized in that the third PLMN is selected based on the third PLMN ID associated with the NSSAI.
  • eNS support is possible in 5GS, and the visited mobile network (VPLMN) considering the support of slices used by the UE in the home mobile network (HPLMN) at the destination. You can choose.
  • VPN visited mobile network
  • HPLMN home mobile network
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the mobile communication system 1 used in each embodiment
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a detailed configuration of the mobile communication system 1.
  • the mobile communication system 1 is composed of UE_A10, access network_A80, core network_A90, PDN (Packet Data Network) _A5, access network _B120, core network _B190, and DN (Data Network) _A6. It is stated that
  • these devices / functions may be described by omitting symbols such as UE, access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, DN, etc. ..
  • Fig. 2 shows the devices / functions of UE_A10, E-UTRAN80, MME40, SGW35, PGW-U30, PGW-C32, PCRF60, HSS50, 5G AN120, AMF140, UPF130, SMF132, PCF160, UDM150, N3IWF170, etc. An interface for connecting these devices / functions to each other is described.
  • these devices / functions are described as UE, E-UTRAN, MME, SGW, PGW-U, PGW-C, PCRF, HSS, 5GAN, AMF, UPF, SMF, PCF, UDM, N3IWF, etc. , The symbol may be omitted.
  • the EPS Evolved Packet System
  • 4G system is configured to include the access network_A and the core network_A, but may further include the UE and / or PDN.
  • 5GS which is a 5G system, is configured to include a UE, an access network_B, and a core network_B, but may further include a DN.
  • the UE is a device that can connect to network services via 3GPP access (3GPP access network, also called 3GPP AN) and / or non-3GPP access (non-3GPP access network, also called non-3GPP AN).
  • 3GPP access network also called 3GPP AN
  • non-3GPP access network also called non-3GPP AN
  • the UE may be a terminal device capable of wireless communication such as a mobile phone or a smartphone, and may be a terminal device capable of connecting to both EPS and 5GS.
  • the UE may be provided with UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) or eUICC (Embedded UICC).
  • UICC Universal Integrated Circuit Card
  • eUICC embedded UICC
  • the UE may be expressed as a user device or a terminal device.
  • the access network_A corresponds to E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) and / or wireless LAN access network.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • eNB45 may be described by omitting a symbol like eNB.
  • each eNB is connected to each other by, for example, an X2 interface.
  • one or more access points are arranged in the wireless LAN access network.
  • access network_B corresponds to 5G access network (5G AN).
  • 5GAN is composed of NG-RAN (NG Radio Access Network) and / or non-3GPP access network.
  • NG-RAN NG Radio Access Network
  • gNB NR Node B
  • gNB122 may be described by omitting symbols such as eNB.
  • the gNB is a node that provides the NR (New Radio) user plane and control plane to the UE, and is a node that connects to the 5GCN via an NG interface (including an N2 interface or an N3 interface).
  • gNB is a base station device newly designed for 5GS, and has a function different from that of the base station device (eNB) used in EPS, which is a 4G system.
  • eNB base station device
  • EPS base station device
  • each gNB is connected to each other by, for example, an Xn interface.
  • the non-3GPP access network may be an untrusted non-3GPP (untrusted non-3GPP) access network or a trusted non-3GPP (trusted non-3GPP) access network.
  • the unreliable non-3GPP access network may be a non-3GPP access network that does not perform security management in the access network, for example, a public wireless LAN.
  • the reliable non-3GPP access network may be an access network defined by 3GPP, and may include TNAP (trusted non-3GPP access point) and TNGF (trusted non-3GPP Gateway function).
  • E-UTRAN and NG-RAN may be referred to as 3GPP access.
  • wireless LAN access network and non-3GPP AN may be referred to as non-3GPP access.
  • the nodes arranged in the access network_B may be collectively referred to as NG-RAN nodes.
  • the devices included in the access network_A and / or the access network_B and / or the access network_A, and / or the devices included in the access network_B are the access network or the access network device. It may be called.
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • EPC includes, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), SGW (Serving Gateway), PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) -U, PGW-C, PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function), HSS (Home Subscriber Server), etc. Be placed.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • SGW Serving Gateway
  • PGW Packet Data Network Gateway
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • HSS Home Subscriber Server
  • core network_B corresponds to 5GCN (5G Core Network).
  • 5GCN 5G Core Network
  • AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • PCF Policy Control Function
  • UDM Unified Data Management
  • 5GCN may be expressed as 5GC.
  • the core network_A and / or the core network_B, the device included in the core network_A, and / or the device included in the core network_B are the core network, or the core network device or the core network. It may be called an internal device.
  • the core network is a mobile network operator (Mobile) that connects the access network (access network_A and / or access network_B) with the PDN and / or DN. It may be an IP mobile communication network operated by Network Operator; MNO), it may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages mobile communication system 1, or it may be an MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator). ), MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler), and other virtual mobile communication operators and virtual mobile communication service providers.
  • MNO IP mobile communication network operated by Network Operator
  • MNO Mobile Virtual Network Operator
  • MVNE Mobile Virtual Network Enabler
  • the core network (core network_A and / or core network_B) and the access network (access network_A and / or access network_B) may be different for each mobile communication carrier.
  • the PDN may be a DN (Data Network) that provides a communication service to the UE.
  • the DN may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service.
  • the PDN may include a connected communication terminal. Therefore, connecting to the PDN may be connecting to a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN. Further, sending and receiving user data to and from the PDN may be sending and receiving user data to and from a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN.
  • PDN may be expressed as DN
  • DN may be expressed as PDN.
  • access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, at least a part of DN, and / or one or more devices included in these are referred to as a network or network device. It may be called. That is, the fact that the network and / or the network device sends and receives messages and / or executes the procedure means that the access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, and DN It means that at least a part and / or one or more devices included therein send and receive messages and / or perform procedures.
  • the UE can connect to the access network.
  • the UE can also connect to the core network via the access network.
  • the UE can connect to the PDN or DN via the access network and core network. That is, the UE can send and receive (communicate) user data with the PDN or DN.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • non-IP communication may be used.
  • IP communication is data communication using IP, and data is transmitted and received by IP packets.
  • An IP packet is composed of an IP header and a payload part.
  • the payload section may include devices / functions included in EPS and data transmitted / received by devices / functions included in 5GS.
  • non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and data is transmitted and received in a format different from the structure of IP packets.
  • non-IP communication may be data communication realized by sending and receiving application data to which an IP header is not added, or a UE can add another header such as a Mac header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header. User data to be sent and received may be sent and received.
  • the access network_A, the core network_A, the access network_B, the core network_B, the PDN_A, and the DN_A may be configured with devices not shown in FIG.
  • core network_A and / or core network_B and / or PDN_A and / or DN_A includes AUSF (Authentication Server Function) and AAA (Authentication, authorization, and accounting) server (AAA-S). May be good.
  • AAA server may be located outside the core network.
  • AUSF is a core network device equipped with an authentication function for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access. Specifically, it is a network function unit that receives an authentication request for 3GPP access and / or non-3GPP access from the UE and executes the authentication procedure.
  • the AAA server is a device that has authentication, approval, and billing functions that connects directly to AUSF or indirectly via other network devices.
  • the AAA server may be a network device in the core network.
  • the AAA server may not be included in the core network_A and / or the core network_B, but may be included in the PLMN. That is, the AAA server may be a core network device or a device outside the core network.
  • the AAA server may be a server device in the PLMN managed by the 3rd Party.
  • the mobile communication system 1 includes a plurality of UE_A10, E-UTRAN80, MME40, SGW35, PGW-U30, PGW-C32, PCRF60, HSS50, 5G AN120, AMF140, UPF130, SMF132, PCF160, and / or UDM150. Etc. may be configured.
  • each device may be configured as physical hardware, may be configured as logical (virtual) hardware configured on general-purpose hardware, or may be configured as software. May be done. Further, at least a part (including all) of the functions of each device may be configured as physical hardware, logical hardware, or software.
  • each storage unit in each device / function appearing below may be, for example, a semiconductor memory or SSD (semiconductor memory). It consists of Solid State Drive), HDD (Hard Disk Drive), etc.
  • each storage unit has not only the information originally set from the shipping stage, but also devices / functions other than its own device / function (for example, UE and / or access network device, and / or core network device, and /. Or PDN and / or DN) can store various information sent and received.
  • each storage unit can store identification information, control information, flags, parameters, and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in various communication procedures described later. Further, each storage unit may store such information for each UE. In addition, each storage unit can store control messages and user data sent and received between 5GS and / or devices / functions included in EPS when interwork is performed between 5GS and EPS. can. At this time, not only those transmitted / received via the N26 interface but also those transmitted / received without the N26 interface can be stored.
  • the UE is composed of a control unit_A300, an antenna 310, a transmission / reception unit_A320, and a storage unit_A340.
  • the control unit_A300, the transmission / reception unit_A320, and the storage unit_A340 are connected via a bus.
  • the transmitter / receiver_A320 is connected to the antenna 310.
  • Control unit_A300 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UE.
  • the control unit_A300 realizes various processes in the UE by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_A340 as needed.
  • the transmission / reception unit_A320 is a functional unit for wireless communication with a base station device (eNB or gNB) in the access network via an antenna. That is, the UE can send and receive user data and / or control information between the access network device and / or the core network device and / or PDN and / or DN using the transmitter / receiver_A320. can.
  • a base station device eNB or gNB
  • the UE can communicate with the base station device (eNB) in the E-UTRAN via the LTE-Uu interface by using the transmission / reception unit_A320.
  • the UE can communicate with the base station device (gNB) in the 5GAN by using the transmission / reception unit_A320.
  • the UE can send and receive NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) messages to and from AMF via the N1 interface by using the transmitter / receiver _A320.
  • NAS Non-Access-Stratum
  • the storage unit_A340 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of the UE.
  • the gNB is composed of a control unit_B500, an antenna 510, a network connection unit_B520, a transmission / reception unit_B530, and a storage unit_B540.
  • the control unit_B500, network connection unit_B520, transmission / reception unit_B530, and storage unit_B540 are connected via a bus.
  • the transmitter / receiver_B530 is connected to the antenna 510.
  • Control unit_B500 is a functional unit that controls the operation and function of the entire gNB.
  • the control unit_B500 realizes various processes in the gNB by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B540 as needed.
  • the network connection part_B520 is a functional part for gNB to communicate with AMF and / or UPF. That is, the gNB can send and receive user data and / or control information between the AMF and / or the UPF by using the network connection unit_B520.
  • the transmitter / receiver_B530 is a functional unit for wireless communication with the UE via the antenna 510. That is, the gNB can transmit / receive user data and / or control information to / from the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
  • the gNB in the 5GAN can communicate with the AMF via the N2 interface by using the network connection _B520, and the UPF via the N3 interface. Can communicate with.
  • gNB can communicate with the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
  • the storage unit_B540 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of gNB.
  • the AMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740.
  • the control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus.
  • the AMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
  • Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire AMF.
  • the control unit_B700 realizes various processes in AMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
  • the network connection part_B720 is a functional part for AMF to connect to the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM, and / or SCEF. That is, the AMF uses the network connection_B720 to communicate with the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM, and / or SCEF. Data and / or control information can be sent and received.
  • the AMF within the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N2 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UDM via the N8 interface. It can communicate, can communicate with the SMF via the N11 interface, and can communicate with the PCF via the N15 interface.
  • AMF can send and receive NAS messages to and from the UE via the N1 interface by using the network connection unit_A620.
  • the N1 interface is logical, communication between the UE and AMF is actually done via 5GAN. If the AMF supports the N26 interface, it can communicate with the MME via the N26 interface by using the network connection _A620.
  • the storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of AMF.
  • AMF has a function to exchange control messages with RAN using N2 interface, a function to exchange NAS messages with UE using N1 interface, a function to encrypt and protect the integrity of NAS messages, and registration management.
  • the RM status for each UE is managed.
  • the RM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF.
  • the RM state includes a non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registered state (RM-REGISTERED state).
  • RM-DEREGISTERED state the UE is not registered in the network, and the UE context in the AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for the UE, so the AMF cannot reach the UE.
  • the RM-REGISTERED state the UE is registered in the network, so the UE can receive services that require registration with the network.
  • the RM state may be expressed as a 5GMM state.
  • the RM-DEREGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-DEREGISTERED state
  • the RM-REGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-REGISTERED state.
  • 5GMM-REGISTERED may be in a state in which each device has established a 5GMM context or a PDU session context.
  • UE_A10 may start sending and receiving user data and control messages, or may respond to paging. Further, when each device is 5GMM-REGISTERED, UE_A10 may execute a registration procedure other than the registration procedure for initial registration and / or a service request procedure.
  • each device may be in a state where the 5GMM context has not been established, the position information of UE_A10 may not be known to the network, or the network reaches UE_A10. It may be in an impossible state. If each device is 5GMM-DEREGISTERED, UE_A10 may start the registration procedure or establish the 5GMM context by executing the registration procedure.
  • the CM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF.
  • the CM state includes a non-connected state (CM-IDLE state) and a connected state (CM-CONNECTED state).
  • CM-IDLE state the UE is in the RM-REGISTERED state, but does not have a NAS signaling connection established with the AMF via the N1 interface.
  • N2 connection N2 connection
  • N3 connection N3 interface connection
  • the CM-CONNECTED state it has a NAS signaling connection established with AMF via the N1 interface.
  • the CM-CONNECTED state it has a NAS signaling connection established with AMF via the N1 interface.
  • the CM-CONNECTED state the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and / or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
  • the CM state in 3GPP access and the CM state in non-3GPP access may be managed separately.
  • the CM state in 3GPP access may be a non-connected state in 3GPP access (CM-IDLE state over 3GPP access) and a connected state in 3GPP access (CM-CONNECTED state over 3GPP access).
  • the CM state in non-3GPP access includes the non-connected state (CM-IDLE state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access and the connection state (CM-CONNECTED state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access. ) May be there.
  • the disconnected state may be expressed as an idle mode
  • the connected state mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
  • the CM state may be expressed as 5GMM mode (5GMM mode).
  • the non-connected state may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode)
  • the connected state may be expressed as 5GMM connected mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode).
  • the disconnected state in 3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connection mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over 3GPP access) in 3GPP access
  • the connection state in 3GPP access is 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-) in 3GPP access. It may be expressed as CONNECTED mode over 3GPP access).
  • non-connection state in non-3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connection mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access, and the connection state in non-3GPP access is non. It may be expressed as 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode over non-3GPP access) in -3GPP access.
  • the 5GMM non-connection mode may be expressed as an idle mode, and the 5GMM connection mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
  • AMF may be placed in the core network_B.
  • AMF may be an NF that manages one or more NSIs (Network Slice Instances).
  • the AMF may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)) shared among a plurality of NSIs.
  • CCNF Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)
  • N3IWF is a device and / or function that is placed between non-3GPP access and 5GCN when the UE connects to 5GS via non-3GPP access.
  • the SMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740.
  • the control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus.
  • the SMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
  • Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire SMF.
  • the control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the SMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
  • the network connection part_B720 is a functional part for SMF to connect with AMF and / or UPF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM. That is, the SMF can send and receive user data and / or control information between the AMF and / or the UPF and / or the PCF and / or the UDM by using the network connection part_B720.
  • the SMF in the 5GCN can communicate with the AMF via the N11 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UPF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the PCF via the N7 interface, and it can communicate with the UDM via the N10 interface.
  • Storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of SMF.
  • SMF has session management functions such as establishment, modification, and release of PDU sessions, IP address allocation and management functions for UEs, UPF selection and control functions, and appropriate destinations (destination). ), UPF setting function for routing traffic to), function to send and receive SM part of NAS message, function to notify that downlink data has arrived (Downlink Data Notification), AN via N2 interface via AMF It has a function to provide SM information peculiar to AN (for each AN) transmitted to, a function to determine the SSC mode (Session and Service Continuity mode) for the session, a roaming function, and the like.
  • SSC mode Session and Service Continuity mode
  • the UPF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740.
  • the control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus.
  • the UPF may be a node that handles the control plane.
  • Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UPF.
  • the control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the UPF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
  • the network connection unit_B720 is a functional unit for the UPF to connect to the base station equipment (gNB) and / or SMF and / or DN in 5GAN. That is, the UPF uses the network connection _B720 to send and receive user data and / or control information between the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF and / or DN. Can be done.
  • the UPF in the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N3 interface by using the network connection _A620, and with the SMF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the DN via the N6 interface, and it can communicate with other UPFs via the N9 interface.
  • the storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of UPF.
  • the UPF acts as an anchor point for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, as an external PDU session point for interconnecting the DN (ie, as a gateway between the DN and the core network_B).
  • Data transfer function ), packet routing and transfer function, UL CL (Uplink Classifier) function that supports routing of multiple traffic flows to one DN, and multi-homed PDU session support.
  • It has a branching point function, a QoS (Quality of Service) processing function for userplane, a function for verifying uplink traffic, a function for buffering downlink packets, and a function for triggering downlink data notification (Downlink Data Notification).
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • the UPF may also be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication.
  • the UPF may have a function of transferring IP communication, or may have a function of converting between non-IP communication and IP communication.
  • the plurality of gateways to be arranged may be a gateway connecting the core network_B and a single DN.
  • the UPF may have connectivity with other NFs, or may be connected to each device via the other NFs.
  • the user plane is user data transmitted and received between the UE and the network.
  • the user plane may be transmitted and received using a PDN connection or a PDU session.
  • the user plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and / or the S1-U interface and / or the S5 interface and / or the S8 interface and / or the SGi interface.
  • the user plane may be transmitted and received via the interface between the UE and NG RAN and / or the N3 interface and / or the N9 interface and / or the N6 interface.
  • the user plane may be expressed as a U-Plane.
  • control plane is a control message sent and received to control the communication of the UE.
  • the control plane may be transmitted and received using a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) signaling connection between the UE and MME.
  • NAS Non-Access-Stratum
  • the control plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and the S1-MME interface.
  • the control plane may be transmitted and received using the interface between the UE and NG RAN and the N2 interface.
  • the control plane may be expressed as a control plane or a C-Plane.
  • the U-Plane (User Plane; UP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
  • the C-Plane (Control Plane; CP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving control messages, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
  • the network refers to at least a part of the access network_B, core network_B, and DN. Further, one or more devices included in at least a part of the access network_B, the core network_B, and the DN may be referred to as a network or a network device. That is, the fact that the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing may mean that a device (network device and / or control device) in the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing. .. Conversely, the fact that a device in the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing may mean that the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing.
  • SM session management
  • NAS Non-Access-Stratum
  • PDU session modification PDU session modification
  • the procedure for SM or SM procedure includes PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), PDU session modification procedure (PDU session modification procedure), and PDU session release procedure (UE-requested PDU session release procedure). It may be.
  • Each procedure may be a procedure started from the UE or a procedure started from the NW.
  • the MM (Mobility management) message (also referred to as NAS MM message) may be a NAS message used for the procedure for MM, and may be a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and AMF_A240.
  • the MM message includes a registration request message, a registration accept message, a registration reject message, a de-registration request message, and a de-registration accept message.
  • Message, configuration update command message, configuration update complete message, service request message, service accept message, service reject message, notification ) Messages, Notification response messages, etc. may be included.
  • the procedure for MM or MM procedure is registration procedure (Registration procedure), deregistration procedure (De-registration procedure), generic UE configuration update procedure, authentication / approval procedure, service request procedure ( Service request procedure), paging procedure (Paging procedure), notification procedure (Notification procedure) may be included.
  • the 5GS (5G System) service may be a connection service provided using the core network_B190. Further, the 5GS service may be a service different from the EPS service or a service similar to the EPS service.
  • non 5GS service may be a service other than the 5GS service, and may include an EPS service and / or a non EPS service.
  • the PDN (Packet Data Network) type indicates the type of PDN connection, and includes IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6, and non-IP.
  • IPv4 When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4.
  • IPv6 When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6.
  • IPv4v6 When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4 or IPv6.
  • non-IP it indicates that communication is performed by a communication method other than IP, not communication using IP.
  • a PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session can be defined as the relationship between the DN that provides the PDU connectivity service and the UE, but it is established between the UE and the external gateway. It may be connectivity.
  • the UE can send and receive user data to and from the DN using the PDU session.
  • the external gateway may be UPF, SCEF, or the like.
  • the UE can use the PDU session to send and receive user data to and from devices such as application servers located in the DN.
  • each device may manage one or more identification information in association with each other for the PDU session.
  • these identification information may include one or more of DNN, QoS rule, PDU session type, application identification information, NSI identification information, access network identification information, and SSC mode, and other information. It may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, the identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different contents.
  • DNN Data Network Name
  • DNN may be identification information that identifies the core network and / or the external network such as DN.
  • DNN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPF_A235 that connects the core network_B190.
  • the DNN may correspond to an APN (Access Point Name).
  • the PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session type indicates the type of PDU session, and includes IPv4, IPv6, Ethernet, and Unstructured.
  • IPv4 When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4.
  • IPv6 When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6.
  • Ethernet When Ethernet is specified, it indicates that Ethernet frames are sent and received. Further, Ethernet may indicate that communication using IP is not performed.
  • Unstructured it indicates that data is sent and received to the application server etc. in the DN by using the point-to-point (P2P) tunneling technology.
  • P2P point-to-point
  • the PDU session type may include an IP in addition to the above. IP can be specified if the UE can use both IPv4 and IPv6.
  • PLMN Public land mobile network
  • PLMN is a communication network that provides mobile wireless communication services.
  • PLMN is a network managed by an operator who is a (mobile) telecommunications carrier, and the operator can be identified by the PLMN ID.
  • PLMN may mean PLMN ID.
  • the PLMN that matches the MCC (Mobile Country Code) and MNC (Mobile Network Code) of the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) of the UE may be Home PLMN (HPLMN).
  • the visited PLMN (Visited PLMN; VPLMN) may be a PLMN different from the HPLMN or HEPLMN (Home Equivalent PLMN).
  • PLMN may mean core network.
  • the UE may have an Equivalent HPLMN list for identifying one or more EHPLMNs (Equivalent HPLMN, equivalent HPLMN) in the USIM.
  • the PLMN different from HPLMN and / or EHPLMN may be VPLMN (Visited PLMN or vPLMN).
  • the PLMN that the UE has successfully registered may be an RPLMN (Registered PLMN, registered PLMN).
  • RPLMN Registered PLMN, registered PLMN.
  • Each device receives, / or retains, and / or stores an Equivalent PLMN list from the RPLMN to identify one or more EPLMNs (Equivalent PLMN, equivalent PLMN) that can be used equivalently to the RPLMN in the PLMN selection of the UE. You may.
  • the current PLMN is a PLMN requested by the UE and / or a PLMN selected by the UE, and / or an RPLMN, and / or a PLMN permitted by the network, and / or a core network device that sends and receives messages. It may be the PLMN to which it belongs.
  • the requested PLMN means the network to which the message is sent when the UE sends the message. Specifically, it may be the PLMN selected by the UE when the UE sends a message.
  • the required PLMN is the PLMN requested by the UE and may be the current PLMN. Further, when the UE is in the registered state, the requested PLMN may be the registered PLMN.
  • the SOR transparent container information element may include information for HPLMN and / or VPLMN to indicate the optimum roaming destination network for the roaming UE.
  • the SOR transparent container information element may include list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations.
  • SOR transparent container information element and / or list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations may be included in the "Secured packet" encrypted by the security function of PLMN (HPLMN), and is called “Secured packet”. It may be done.
  • the SOR application function which is one of the entities in the core network, may provide UDM with information including list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations.
  • the AMF may refer to the information including the list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations provided to the UDM, generate the SOR transparent container information element based on this information, and send it to the UE.
  • list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations may be a list composed of combinations of PLMN (preferred PLMN) and access technology (access technology), and each combination may be arranged in descending order of priority. ..
  • the combination of PLMN and access technology has the highest priority and can be used. Allowable combinations may be selected.
  • a network slice is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics.
  • UEs and / or networks can support network slices (NW slices; NS) in 5GS.
  • Network slices are sometimes referred to simply as slices.
  • a network slice instance is composed of an instance (entity) of a network function (NF) and a set of necessary resources, and forms a network slice to be arranged.
  • NF is a processing function in the network and is adopted or defined in 3GPP.
  • NSI is an entity of NS that consists of one or more in core network_B.
  • NSI may be composed of a virtual NF (Network Function) generated by using NST (Network Slice Template).
  • NST is a logical expression of one or more NFs associated with a resource request for providing the required communication service and capability.
  • the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B190 composed of a plurality of NFs.
  • NSI may be a logical network configured to separate user data delivered by services and the like.
  • One or more NFs may be configured in NS.
  • the NF configured in NS may or may not be a device shared with other NS.
  • UE and / or devices in the network are 1 or more based on NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI and / or UE usage type and / or registration information such as 1 or more NSI IDs and / or APN. Can be assigned to NS.
  • the UE usage type is a parameter value included in the UE registration information used to identify the NSI.
  • the UE usage type may be stored in the HSS.
  • AMF may select SMF and UPF based on UE usage type.
  • S-NSSAI Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information
  • S-NSSAI may be composed of only SST (Slice / Service type), or may be composed of both SST and SD (Slice Differentiator).
  • SST is information indicating the operation of NS expected in terms of functions and services.
  • SD may be information for interpolating SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSIs represented by SST.
  • the S-NSSAI may be information peculiar to each PLMN, or may be standard information shared among PLMNs.
  • the network may store one or more S-NSSAI in the UE registration information as the default S-NSSAI. If the S-NSSAI is the default S-NSSAI and the UE does not send a valid S-NSSAI to the network in the registration request message, the network may provide the NS related to the UE.
  • the S-NSSAI transmitted and received between the UE and the NW may be expressed as S-NSSAI IE (Information element).
  • the S-NSSAI IE transmitted and received between the UE and NW indicates the S-NSSAI composed of the SST and / or SD of the registered PLMN, and / or the S-NSSAI of the HPLMN to which the S-NSSAI is mapped.
  • SST and / or SD may be configured.
  • One or more S-NSSAIs stored by the UE and / or NW may be composed of SST and / or SD, and S-NSSAI composed of SST and / or SD, and / or S-NSSAI thereof.
  • An SST and / or SD indicating the S-NSSAI of the mapped HP LMN may be configured.
  • NSSAI Network Slice Selection Assistance Information
  • S-NSSAI Network Slice Selection Assistance Information
  • Each S-NSSAI included in NSSAI is information that assists the access network or core network in selecting NSI.
  • the UE may memorize the NSSAI permitted from the network for each PLMN.
  • NSSAI may be the information used to select AMF.
  • the UE may apply each NSSAI (allowed NSSAI and / or configured NSSAI, and / or rejected NSSAI, and / also pending NSSAI, and / or first NSSAI) to PLMN and EPLMN.
  • Mapped S-NSSAI is an HPLMN S-NSSAI mapped to the registered PLMN S-NSSAI in a roaming scenario.
  • the UE may store one or more mapped S-NSSAI mapped to the configured NSSAI and the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI of each access type. Further, the UE may store one or more mapped S-NSSAI of the first NSSAI and / or the rejected NSSAI and / or the S-NSSAI included in the pending NSSAI.
  • the Network Slice-Specific Authentication and Authorization (NSSAA) function is a function for realizing authentication and authorization peculiar to network slices. With network slice-specific authentication and authorization, UE authentication and authorization can be performed outside the core network such as 3rd Party. PLMN and network devices equipped with NSSAA function can execute NSSAA procedure for a certain S-NSSAI based on the registration information of UE. Further, the UE having the NSSAA function can manage, store, and transmit / receive the pending NSSAI and the third rejected NSSAI. In this paper, NSSAA may be referred to as a network slice-specific authentication and authorization procedure or an authentication and authorization procedure.
  • S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA is S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA, which is managed by the core network and / or the core network device.
  • the S-NSSAI requiring NSSAA may be an S-NSSAI other than HPLMN, which is managed by the core network and / or the core network device, and the S-NSSAI requiring NSSAA becomes the mapped S-NSSAI.
  • the core network and / or the core network device may store S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA by associating and storing information indicating whether S-NSSAI and NSSAA are required.
  • the core network and / or the core network device further indicates that S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA and information indicating whether NSSAA is completed or not, or that NSSAA is completed, permitted, or successful.
  • Information may be stored in association with each other.
  • the core network and / or the core network device may manage S-NSSAI requiring NSSAA as information not related to the access network.
  • configured NSSAI (configured NSSAI) is NSSAI supplied and stored in the UE.
  • the UE may store the configured NSSAI for each PLMN.
  • the UE may store the configured NSSAI in association with the PLMN.
  • the configured NSSAI associated with the PLMN may be expressed as the configured NSSAI for the PLMN, the configured NSSAI for the PLMN, the configured NSSAI for the PLMN, or the configured NSSAI associated with the PLMN.
  • the UE may store a configured NSSAI that is not associated with the PLMN and is valid for all PLMNs, and such a configured NSSAI may be referred to as a "default configured NSSAI".
  • the configured NSSAI may be associated with multiple PLMNs, and these multiple PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
  • the configured NSSAI may be information set by the network (or PLMN).
  • S-NSSAI included in configured NSSAI may be expressed as configured S-NSSAI.
  • configured S-NSSAI may be configured to include S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI.
  • the PLMN S-NSSAI may be expressed as "configured S-NSSAI”
  • the S-NSSAI whose configured S-NSSAI is mapped to the HPLMN may be expressed as "mapped S-NSSAI for the configured NSSAI for PLMN".
  • requested NSSAI is NSSAI provided from the UE to the network during the registration procedure.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI transmitted by the UE may be the allowed NSSAI stored in the UE or the S-NSSAI included in the configured NSSAI.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI transmitted by the UE may be the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI stored in the UE.
  • the requested NSSAI may be information indicating the network slice requested by the UE.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI may be expressed as the requested S-NSSAI.
  • requested NSSAI is included in an RRC (Radio Resource Control) message that includes a NAS message or NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) message sent from the UE to the network, such as a registration request message or PDU session establishment request message. Will be done.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • NAS Non-Access-Stratum
  • allowed NSSAI is information indicating one or more network slices in which the UE is permitted.
  • allowed NSSAI is information that identifies the network slice that the network has allowed to connect to the UE.
  • UE and / or NW may store and manage allowed NSSAI for each access (3GPP access or non-3GPP access) as UE information.
  • the UE and / or NW may also manage allowed NSSAI in association with the registration area.
  • the UE and / or NW may store and manage allowed NSSAI in association with PLMN as UE information. Allowed NSSAI may be associated with multiple PLMNs, and these multiple PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
  • the allowed NSSAI associated with PLMN and access type may be expressed as allowed NSSAI for PLMN and access type, or allowed NSSAI for PLMN access type.
  • S-NSSAI included in allowed NSSAI may be expressed as allowed S-NSSAI.
  • the allowed S-NSSAI may be configured to include the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI.
  • rejected NSSAI is information indicating one or more network slices for which the UE is not permitted.
  • rejected NSSAI is information that identifies network slices that the network does not allow the UE to connect to.
  • the rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason for rejection value.
  • the reason for refusal value is information indicating the reason why the network rejects the corresponding S-NSSAI.
  • the UE and the network may appropriately store and manage the rejected NSSAI based on the rejection reason value associated with each S-NSSAI.
  • rejected NSSAI may be included in the NAS message sent from the network to the UE, such as the registration acceptance message, the setting update command, the registration refusal message, or the RRC message including the NAS message.
  • S-NSSAI included in rejected NSSAI may be expressed as rejected S-NSSAI.
  • the rejected NSSAI may be any of the first to third rejected NSSAI, the pending NSSAI, and the first NSSAI, or may be a combination thereof.
  • S-NSSAI included in rejected NSSAI may be expressed as rejected S-NSSAI.
  • the rejected S-NSSAI may be configured to include the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI.
  • UE and / or NW may store and manage rejected NSSAI in association with PLMN as UE information.
  • the rejected NSSAI may be associated with multiple PLMNs, and these multiple PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
  • the rejected NSSAI associated with the PLMN may be expressed as the rejected NSSAI for the PLMN or the rejected NSSAI for the PLMN.
  • the UE and / or NW may further store the second rejected NSSAI and / or the second rejected S-NSSAI in association with the registration area.
  • the UE and / or NW may store the second rejected NSSAI and / or the second rejected S-NSSAI in association with the access type and / or registration area.
  • the first rejected NSSAI is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs that are not available in the current PLMN among the S-NSSAIs included in the requested NSSAIs by the UE.
  • the first rejected NSSAI may be a 5GS rejected NSSAI for the current PLMN, a rejected S-NSSAI for the current PLMN, or an S-NSSAI included in the rejected NSSAI for the current PLMN. There may be.
  • the first rejected NSSAI may be a rejected NSSAI stored in the UE or NW, or may be a rejected NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE.
  • the first rejected NSSAI When the first rejected NSSAI is a rejected NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE, the first rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason value.
  • the reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (S-NSSAI not available in the current PLMN) which is not possible with the current PLMN or SNPN", and the S-NSSAI associated with the reason for refusal value is It may be information indicating that it is not possible with the current PLMN or SNPN.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the first rejected NSSAI may be expressed as the first rejected S-NSSAI.
  • the first rejected NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN.
  • the UE and / or NW may treat the S-NSSAI contained in the first rejected NSSAI and the first rejected NSSAI as information regardless of the access type. That is, the first rejected NSSAI may be valid information for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access.
  • the UE may delete the first rejected NSSAI from the memory when it transitions to the unregistered state with both 3GPP access and non-3GPP access to the current PLMN.
  • the UE may delete the first rejected NSSAI. That is, when the UE transitions to the unregistered state for the current PLMN via one access, the UE is registered for the current PLMN via the other access (registered state). The UE does not have to delete the first rejected NSSAI.
  • the second rejected NSSAI is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs that are not available in the current registration area among the S-NSSAIs that the UE has included in the requested NSSAIs.
  • the second rejected NSSAI may be a 5GS rejected NSSAI for the current registration area.
  • the second rejected NSSAI may be a rejected NSSAI stored in the UE or NW, or may be a rejected NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE.
  • the second rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason value.
  • the reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (S-NSSAI not available in the current registration area) that is not possible in the current registration area", and the S-NSSAI associated with the reason value is It may be information indicating that it is not possible in the current registration area.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the second rejected NSSAI may be expressed as the second rejected S-NSSAI.
  • the second rejected NSSAI may be valid within the current registration area and may be applied to the current registration area.
  • the UE and / or NW may treat the S-NSSAI contained in the second rejected NSSAI and the second rejected NSSAI as information for each access type. That is, the second rejected NSSAI may be valid information for each of 3GPP access and non-3GPP access. That is, once the UE transitions to the unregistered state for a certain access, the UE may delete the second rejected NSSAI associated with the access from the memory.
  • the third rejected NSSAI is an S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA, and is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs for which NSSAA for that S-NSSAI has failed or has been revoked.
  • the third rejected NSSAI may be an NSSAI stored in the UE and / or the NW, or may be an NSSAI transmitted / received between the NW and the UE.
  • the third rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason for refusal value.
  • the reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (S-NSSAI not available due to the failed or revoked NSSAA) which is impossible due to the failure or cancellation of NSSAA" and is associated with the reason for refusal value. It may be information indicating that NSSAA for S-NSSAI has failed or has been cancelled.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI may be expressed as the third rejected S-NSSAI.
  • the third rejected NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN, to the registered PLMN and / or EPLMN, or to all PLMNs.
  • the fact that the third rejected NSSAI applies to all PLMNs may mean that the third rejected NSSAI is not associated with the PLMN, and that the third rejected NSSAI is associated with the HPLMN. You can do it.
  • the UE and / or NW may treat the third rejected NSSAI and the third rejected S-NSSAI as information that does not depend on the access type. That is, the third rejected NSSAI may be valid information for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access.
  • the third rejected NSSAI may be an NSSAI different from the rejected NSSAI.
  • the third rejected NSSAI may be the first rejected NSSAI.
  • the third rejected NSSAI may be a 5GS rejected NSSAI for the failed or revoked NSSAA, a rejected S-NSSAI for the failed or revoked NSSAA, or a rejected NSSAI for the failed or revoked NS. It may be the included S-NSSAI.
  • the third rejected NSSAI is a rejected NSSAI in which the UE identifies slices rejected due to NSSAA failure or cancellation from the core network. Specifically, the UE does not start the registration request procedure for the S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI while storing the third rejected NSSAI.
  • the third rejected NSSAI may be identification information including one or more S-NSSAI received from the core network in association with the rejection reason value indicating the failure of NSSAA.
  • the third rejected NSSAI is information that does not depend on the access type. Specifically, if the UE remembers the third rejected NSSAI, the UE attempts to send a registration request message containing the S-NSSAI contained in the third rejected NSSAI to both 3GPP and non-3GPP access.
  • the UE can send a registration request message including S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI based on the UE policy.
  • the UE may delete the third rejected NSSAI based on the UE policy and transition to a state in which a registration request message including the S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI can be transmitted.
  • the UE may delete the S-NSSAI from the third rejected NSSAI. good.
  • the first NSSAI is information including one or more S-NSSAIs that have reached the maximum number of UEs for each network slice.
  • the first NSSAI may be rejected NSSAI, allowed NSSAI, or pending NSSAI.
  • the first NSSAI may be an NSSAI stored in the UE and / or the NW, or may be an NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE.
  • the first NSSAI When the first NSSAI is sent from the NW to the UE, the first NSSAI is the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI, the rejection reason value, the backoff timer value, and the validity period of the backoff timer value.
  • the information may include one or a plurality of information indicating a range and information including at least one.
  • the reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI that has reached the maximum number of UEs for each network slice", and that the maximum number of UEs that can be allowed for S-NSSAI associated with the reason for refusal value has been reached. It may be the information to be shown.
  • the reason for refusal value may be the reason for refusal value included in rejected NSSAI, flag information, or 5 GMM cause.
  • the value of the backoff timer is the period during which the UE is prohibited from transmitting the MM message and the SM message using the corresponding S-NSSAI or S-NSSAI related to the mapped S-NSSAI. It may be information indicating.
  • the information indicating the valid period range of the backoff timer value is whether the backoff timer value is applied to the current PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network), all PLMNs, or the current registration. It may be information indicating whether the area is valid.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the first NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN, may be valid for all PLMNs, may be applied, may be valid within the registered area, and may be with the registered PLMN. It may be applied to the EPLMN, or it may be applied to one or more PLMNs to which the TAI included in the TA list (TAI list or registration area) belongs.
  • the fact that the first NSSAI applies to all PLMNs may mean that the first NSSAI is not associated with the PLMN, or that the first NSSAI is associated with the HPLMN. ..
  • the UE and / or NW will be the first NSSAI and / or NW.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the first NSSAI may be treated as information that does not depend on the access type. If the first NSSAI is valid within the registration area, or if it applies to one or more PLMNs to which the TAI contained in the TA list (TAI list or registration area) belongs, the UE and / or NW will be the first.
  • the NSSAI of 1 and the S-NSSAI included in the 1st NSSAI may be treated as information for each access type.
  • the first NSSAI may be allowed NSSAI, rejected NSSAI, pending NSSAI, or information different from these.
  • Pending NSSAI is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs that the UE cannot and / or cannot use.
  • the pending NSSAI is an S-NSSAI whose network requires network slice specific authentication, and may be a set of S-NSSAI whose network slice specific authentication has not been completed.
  • the pending NSSAI may be a 5GS pending NSSAI.
  • the pending NSSAI may be an NSSAI stored in the UE and / or the NW, or may be an NSSAI transmitted / received between the NW and the UE.
  • the pending NSSAI When the pending NSSAI is an NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE, the pending NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason for refusal value.
  • the reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (NSSAA is pending for the S-NSSAI)", and the S-NSSAI associated with the reason for refusal value is the S-NSSAI. It may be information indicating that the UE is prohibited or pending from use until the completion of NSSAA for NSSAI.
  • the pending NSSAI is an NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE
  • the pending NSSAI may be a set of combinations of S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI.
  • the pending NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN, one or more EPLMNs of the registered PLMN and the registered PLMN, or all PLMNs.
  • the fact that the pending NSSAI applies to all PLMNs may mean that the pending NSSAI is not associated with the PLMN, or that the pending NSSAI is associated with the HPLMN.
  • UE and / or NW may treat S-NSSAI included in pending NSSAI as information that does not depend on the access type. That is, pending NSSAI may be valid information for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access.
  • the pending NSSAI may be an NSSAI different from the rejected NSSAI.
  • the pending NSSAI may be the first rejected NSSAI.
  • Pending NSSAI is an NSSAI composed of one or more S-NSSAIs in which the UE identifies the slice that is pending the procedure. Specifically, the UE does not start the registration request procedure for the S-NSSAI included in the pending NSSAI while storing the pending NSSAI. In other words, the UE will not use the S-NSSAI contained in the pending NSSAI during the registration process until the NSSAA for the S-NSSAI contained in the pending NSSAI is completed.
  • pending NSSAI is information that does not depend on the access type. Specifically, when the UE stores the pending NSSAI, the UE does not attempt to send the registration request message including the S-NSSAI included in the pending NSSAI to both 3GPP access and non-3GPP access.
  • the tracking area is a single or multiple range managed by the core network that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10.
  • the tracking area may be composed of a plurality of cells. Further, the tracking area may be a range in which a control message such as paging is broadcast, or a range in which UE_A10 can move without performing a handover procedure. Further, the tracking area may be a routing area, a location area, or the same as these.
  • the tracking area may be TA (Tracking Area).
  • the tracking area may be identified by a TAI (Tracking Area Identity) composed of TAC (Tracking area code) and PLMN.
  • the registration area (Registration area or registration area) is a set of one or more TAs assigned to the UE by AMF.
  • UE_A10 may be able to move without transmitting and receiving a signal for updating the tracking area while moving within one or a plurality of TAs included in the registration area.
  • the registration area may be a group of information indicating an area in which UE_A10 can move without executing the tracking area update procedure.
  • the registration area may be identified by a TAI list consisting of one or more TAIs.
  • the TAI included in the TAI list may belong to one PLMN or may belong to a plurality of PLMNs. If multiple TAIs included in the TAI list belong to different PLMNs, those PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
  • the UE ID is information for identifying the UE.
  • the UE ID is SUCI (SUbscription Concealed Identifier), SUPI (Subscription Permanent Identifier), GUTI (Globally Unique Temporary Identifier), IMEI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity), or IME ISV (IMEI Software Version).
  • SUCI SUbscription Concealed Identifier
  • SUPI Subscribe Permanent Identifier
  • GUTI Globally Unique Temporary Identifier
  • IMEI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • IME ISV IMEI Software Version
  • the UE ID may be other information set in the application or network.
  • the UE ID may be information for identifying the user.
  • Management of the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice is to manage the maximum number of UEs that can be registered in the network slice or S-NSSAI at the same time.
  • the UE registered in the network slice or S-NSSAI may mean that the S-NSSAI indicating the network slice is included in the allowed NSSAI and stored.
  • Supports the function of managing the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice The device in the network can memorize whether or not the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice needs to be managed for each S-NSSAI, and the registered UEs It can be confirmed during the registration procedure whether or not the maximum number of constants has been reached.
  • each device that supports the function of managing the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice may be able to store the first NSSAI.
  • the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice may be expressed as the maximum number of UEs connected for each slice, the maximum number of UEs that can be registered in a network slice or S-NSSAI, the maximum number of UEs, or a constant. ..
  • the backoff timer is a timer for prohibiting the transmission of MM messages by the UE and / or the start of procedures by SM messages.
  • the backoff timer is managed and executed by the UE.
  • the backoff timer may be associated with S-NSSAI.
  • the UE prohibits, restricts, or restricts the transmission of MM messages and / or the transmission of SM messages using the S-NSSAI while the backoff timer associated with the S-NSSAI is valid. It may be in the state of being done.
  • These regulations may be regulations based on 5GS congestion management, or may be regulations including regulations based on 5GS congestion management.
  • the backoff timer may be a timer that is started and / or stopped in units of S-NSSAI and / or PLMN.
  • the backoff timer may be associated with S-NSSAI, and may be a timer for prohibiting the transmission of MM messages and / or SM messages using a specific S-NSSAI.
  • the UE may be configured not to send MM and / or SM messages using that particular S-NSSAI while this timer is counting.
  • the UE will allow the new PLMN to send MM and / or SM messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. It may be set. If it is expressed that the transmission of MM message and / or SM message, which was prohibited by PLMN before the change, is allowed, the same S-NSSAI and / as S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer. Or it is permissible to send MM messages and / or SM messages using S-NSSAI related to the same S-NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI related to the same S-NSSAI mapped S-NSSAI. It may mean.
  • the backoff timer may be a timer for prohibiting the transmission of MM messages using a specific NSSAI.
  • the UE may be configured not to send MM messages using that particular NSSAI and / or NSSAI containing a particular S-NSSAI while this timer is counting.
  • the UE may be set to allow the transmission of MM messages prohibited by the PLMN before the change in the new PLMN based on the specific conditions described later during the counting of this timer. If it is expressed that the transmission of MM messages, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, is allowed, the same NSSAI as the NSSAI associated with the backoff timer and / or the S associated with the backoff timer. -It may mean that the transmission of MM messages using NSSAI containing the same S-NSSAI as NSSAI is allowed.
  • NSSAI including S-NSSAI related to S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer may mean that the transmission of MM messages using NSSAI including S-NSSAI related to the mapped S-NSSAI of S-NSSAI associated with the off-timer is allowed.
  • the backoff timer may be a timer associated with noNSSAI and prohibiting the transmission of the MM message using noNSSAI.
  • UE_A10 may be set not to send MM messages using noNSSAI during the counting of this timer.
  • UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send MM messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer.
  • it when it is expressed that the transmission of the MM message prohibited by the PLMN before the change is permitted, it may mean that the MM message using no NSSAI is permitted.
  • the backoff timer may be a 5 GMM timer and / or an EMM (EPS mobility management) timer. Further, the backoff timer may be a timer T3448 or a timer equivalent to the timer T3448. In other words, the backoff timer may be the same timer as the timer for regulating the communication of user data via the control plane, or may be the same timer.
  • EMM EPS mobility management
  • the first identification information in the present embodiment includes NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted by UE_A10 and NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted by UE.
  • NSSAI S-NSSAI (s)
  • S-NSSAI S-NSSAI
  • UE_A10 With the capability information (capacity) of UE_A10 indicating that it supports the function of receiving, recognizing, processing, and storing the combined information from the network in association with the PLMN (visited PLMN; vPLMN) or EHPLMN of the visited visit. It may be there.
  • the first identification information may be UE capability information indicating whether UE_A10 supports the function.
  • the first identifying information receives and recognizes from the core network information containing one or more PLMNs (only) that UE_A10 supports only the requested and / or authorized NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)). However, it may be UE_A10 capability information indicating that it supports the function to process. Further, the first identification information may be UE capability information indicating whether UE_A10 supports the function.
  • S-NSSAI authorized NSSAI
  • the first identifying information is a vPLMN that supports a combination of UE_A10 in the core network, UE_A10 requesting and / or allowed NSSAI and UE_A10 supporting vPLMN supporting requested and / or allowed NSSAI. Or with EHPLMN information or identification information to request core network capability information indicating that UE_A10 supports the ability to generate, process and transmit vPLMN information that supports the requested and / or authorized NSSAI. It may be there.
  • the combination of NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) and PLMNID that UE_A10 receives from the network, recognizes, and processes is the information that one PLMNID is associated with one S-NSSAI. It may be information in which multiple S-NSSAIs are associated and combined for one PLMNID, or information in which multiple PLMNIDs are associated and combined in one S-NSSAI. There may be.
  • the first identification information may be information indicating that UE_A10 has a function of storing an extended SOR (Steering of Roaming) transparent container information element (SOR transparent container IE), or may be information indicating that the UE_A10 has an extended allowed NSSAI. It may be information indicating that it has a function of storing.
  • SOR transparent container IE extended SOR transparent container information element
  • the core network selects the PLMN (visited PLMN; vPLMN) of the UE_A10 visit that supports the NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted by the UE_A10.
  • PLMN visited PLMN
  • vPLMN virtual PLMN
  • the capability information of the core network indicating that it supports the function of transmitting the selected PLMN information (PLMN ID) to UE_A10.
  • the second identification information may be the capability information of the core network indicating whether or not the core network supports the above function.
  • the PLMN information transmitted by the core network to the UE_A10 may be the information combined with the NSSAI requested by the core network and / or permitted from the core network, or may be the PLMN information selected as described above. It may be only information (PLMN ID).
  • the core network when the core network sends PLMN information as combined information in association with NSSAI (slice information), it may be information in which one S-NSSAI is associated with one PLMN ID and combined, or 1
  • the information may be a combination of a plurality of S-NSSAIs associated with one PLMNID, or may be a combination of a plurality of PLMNIDs associated with a single S-NSSAI.
  • the third identification information in the present embodiment is the information (PLMN ID) that UE_A10 identifies one or more PLMNs (vPLMN (s)) that can be used as the destination network, and each PLMN supports it.
  • the information may be a combination of NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) in association with each other, and may be information including a plurality of such combined information.
  • the combination of PLMN ID and NSSAI may be information in which one S-NSSAI is associated with one PLMN ID and combined, or a plurality of S-NSSAI are associated and combined with one PLMN ID. It may be the information that has been created, or it may be the information that one S-NSSAI is associated with and combined with a plurality of PLMN IDs.
  • the PLMN information (PLMN ID) included in the third identification information is selected by the core network based on the S-NSSAI requested and / or permitted by UE_A10 in the home network (home PLMN; hPLMN). It may be one or more PLMN IDs.
  • the third identification information is composed of one or a plurality of combinations in which information indicating access technology (access technology; PLMN Access Technology Identifier) is further associated in addition to the association between PLMN ID and S-NSSAI. Information may be included.
  • access technology access technology; PLMN Access Technology Identifier
  • the third identification information may be an information element that is an extension of the SOR (Steering of Roaming) transparent container information element (SOR transparent container IE), or may be information that is an extension of allowed NSSAI.
  • the extended SOR transparent container information element is a combination of PLMN ID and access technology in the list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations included in the SOR transparent container information element.
  • NSSAI S-NSSAI (s)
  • the extended allowed NSSAI adds one or more PLMN IDs that support each S-NSSAI in addition to the combination of multiple S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI. It may be composed of the above combinations and include other information.
  • the core network should send the third identification information to the UE_A10. Instead, you may send the unextended SOR transparent container IE or the unextended allowed S-NSSAI.
  • the third identification information may be composed of an S-NSSAI (for example, allowed S-NSSAI) permitted by the core network to the UE and a list of one or more PLMNs associated with the S-NSSAI.
  • the core network may be PLMN.
  • the fourth identification information in the present embodiment may be identification information in which UE_A10 is composed of information (PLMN ID) for identifying one or more networks (vPLMN) that can be used as a destination network.
  • PLMN ID information for identifying one or more networks
  • vPLMN networks
  • the PLMN information (PLMN ID) included in the fourth identification information is selected by the core network based on the S-NSSAI requested and / or permitted by UE_A10 in the home network (home PLMN; hPLMN). It may be one or more PLMN IDs.
  • the fourth identification information may be one or a plurality of combinations in which the PLMN ID and the information indicating the access technology (access technology; PLMN Access Technology Identifier) are associated with each other.
  • the fourth identification information may be SOR transparent container IE, and for the information element, UE_A10 supports NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted to the network, and the core. It may contain one or more PLMNs (s) selected by the network.
  • S-NSSAI S-NSSAI
  • PLMNs PLMNs
  • the fourth identification information may be an information element that is an extension of the SOR transparent container information element (SOR transparent container IE), or may be information that is an extension of allowed NSSAI.
  • the extended SOR transparent container information element is a combination of PLMN ID and access technology in the list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations included in the SOR transparent container information element.
  • NSSAI S-NSSAI (s)
  • the extended allowed NSSAI adds one or more PLMN IDs that support each S-NSSAI in addition to the combination of multiple S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI. It may be composed of the above combinations and include other information.
  • the core network should send the third identification information to the UE_A10. Instead, you may send a conventional SOR transparent container IE that does not consider PLMN's S-NSSAI support.
  • the procedure used in each embodiment includes a registration procedure (Registration procedure), a UE configuration update procedure (Generic UE configuration update procedure), and PLMN selection. Each procedure will be explained below.
  • HSS and UDM, PCF and PCRF, SMF and PGW-C, UPF and PGW-U are the same device (that is, the same physical device).
  • the case where it is configured as hardware, the same logical hardware, or the same software) will be described as an example. However, the content described in this embodiment is also applicable when they are configured as different devices (ie, different physical hardware, or different logical hardware, or different software).
  • data may be transmitted / received directly between them, data may be transmitted / received via the N26 interface between AMF and MME, or data may be transmitted / received via UE.
  • the registration procedure is a procedure for the UE to take the initiative in registering with the access network_B and / or the core network_B and / or the DN.
  • the UE can execute this procedure at any time, for example, when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network. In other words, the UE can start this procedure at any time if it is in the unregistered state (5GMM-DEREGISTERED state).
  • each device can transition to the registration state (5GMM-REGISTEDED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
  • Each registration state may be managed by each device for each access. Specifically, each device may independently manage the registered status (registered or unregistered status) for 3GPP access and the registered status for non-3GPP access.
  • the registration procedure is to update the UE location registration information in the network and / or to periodically notify the network of the UE status from the UE and / or to update certain parameters about the UE in the network. It may be the procedure of.
  • the UE may start the registration procedure when it has mobility across the TA (tracking area). In other words, the UE may start the registration procedure when it moves to a TA different from the TA indicated in the held TA list (TAI list or registration area). In addition, the UE may initiate this procedure when the running backoff timer, or other timer, has expired. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation of the PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process if there is a change in the ability information and / or preferences regarding the establishment of the UE's PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process on a regular basis.
  • the UE may be based on the completion of the UE configuration update procedure, or on the basis of the completion of the registration procedure, or on the basis of the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, or on the basis of the completion of the PDU session management procedure, or in each procedure.
  • the registration procedure may be initiated based on the information received from the network or based on the expiration or suspension of the backoff timer.
  • the UE is not limited to these, and can execute the registration procedure at any timing.
  • the procedure for transitioning from the state in which the UE is not registered in the network to the state in which it is registered is defined as an initial registration procedure or a registration procedure for initial registration.
  • the registration procedure executed while the UE is registered in the network can be changed to the registration procedure (registration procedure for mobility and periodic registration update) or the transfer and regular registration procedure (registration procedure for mobility and periodic registration update). Mobility and periodic registration procedure) may be used.
  • the UE may execute the PLMN selection before the registration procedure or in the initial state of the registration procedure, and select and determine the PLMN required by the UE.
  • the new AMF141 in Fig. 6 indicates the AMF in which UE_A10 was registered by this procedure
  • the old AMF142 means the AMF in which the UE was registered by the procedure prior to this procedure. If no change in AMF occurs in this procedure, the interface between old AMF142 and new AMF141 and the procedure between old AMF142 and new AMF141 do not occur, and new AMF141 may be the same device as old AMF142. In the present embodiment, when AMF is described, it may mean new AMF141, old AMF142, or both. Note that new AMF141 and old AMF142 may be AMF140.
  • UE_A10 starts the registration procedure by sending a registration request message to new AMF141 (S600) (S602) (S604). Specifically, the UE sends an RRC message including a registration request message to 5G AN120 (or gNB) (S600).
  • the registration request message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface.
  • the RRC message may be a control message sent and received between the UE and 5G AN120 (or gNB).
  • NAS messages are processed at the NAS layer, and RRC messages are processed at the RRC layer.
  • the NAS layer is a higher layer than the RRC layer.
  • UE_A10 can send the first identification information by including it in the registration request message and / or the RRC message.
  • UE_A10 may send the registration request message and / or the RRC message with identification information indicating the type of this procedure.
  • the identification information indicating the type of this procedure may be 5GS registration type IE, and this procedure is for initial registration, for updating registration information due to movement, or for periodical update of registration information. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that the registration procedure is for emergency registration.
  • the UE_A10 may include the UE ability information in the registration request message in order to notify the network of the functions supported by the UE_A10, or may include the first identification information as the UE ability information.
  • the capability information of the UE may be 5G MM capability of 5GS.
  • UE_A10 may send this identification information by including it in a control message different from these, for example, a control message of a layer lower than the RRC layer (for example, MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer).
  • UE_A10 may indicate that UE_A10 supports each function by transmitting these identification information, may indicate a request of the UE, or may indicate both of them. ..
  • the information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received as the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
  • UE_A10 determines whether or not to transmit the first identification information to the network, the ability information of the UE and / or the UE policy, and / or the state of the UE, and / or the registration information of the user, and / or the UE. It may be selected and decided based on the context held by.
  • UE_A10 identifies and processes the combination information of PLMN ID and NSSAI (S-NSSAI) supported by PLMN contained in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information used for PLMN selection after movement.
  • the first identification information may be included in the registration request message and transmitted when the function for the above is provided. By transmitting the first identification information, UE_A10 processes the combination information of PLMN ID and NSSAI (S-NSSAI) supported by PLMN contained in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. It may be shown to the network that it has a function for the purpose.
  • UE_A10 may indicate that the first identification information is included in the registration request message and transmitted to request the network capability information indicating that the network supports the function corresponding to the first identification information. ..
  • UE_A10 retains the ability to support the function indicated by the first identification information, and UE_A10 is included in the NSSAI (requested NSSAI) requested to be used in the PLMN (HPLMN) registered by this procedure. It is assumed that one or more S-NSSAI will be used in VPLMN or EHPMN to register and connect after UE mobility occurs, and even if the first identification information is included in the registration request message when requested, it will be added to the network. You may send it.
  • NSSAI quested NSSAI
  • HPLMN PLMN
  • UE_A10 may include other than the first identification information in the registration request message and / or the RRC message including the registration request message, for example, UEID and / or PLMNID and / or AMF identification information and / or requested NSSAI. May be included in the transmission.
  • the AMF identification information may be information for identifying AMF or a set of AMF, for example, 5G-S-TMSI (5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier) or GUAMI (Globally Unique AMF Identifier). You can.
  • 5G-S-TMSI 5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier
  • GUAMI Globally Unique AMF Identifier
  • the UE may include the requested NSSAI in the registration request message and send it to the requesting PLMN.
  • UE_A10 may include the requested NSSAI in the registration request message and send it to the requesting PLMN.
  • UE_A10 has a plurality of allowed NSSAIs. It may mean that it is stored in association with the PLMN (requested PLMN and other PLMN).
  • the PLMN is different from the PLMN required by the UE.
  • the UE stores the allowed NSSAI associated with or the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI and the PLMN list that supports the S-NSSAI, and the PLMN list contains the PLMN required by the UE. It may be.
  • UE_A10 may include the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI associated with the PLMN different from the PLMN requested by the UE in the requested NSSAI.
  • UE_A10 may include the mapped S-NSSAI of S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI associated with the PLMN different from the PLMN requested by the UE in the Requested mapped NSSAI of 5GS.
  • UE_A10 may include the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI associated with the HPLMN in the 5GS Requested mapped NSSAI and send it to the network in the registration request procedure for the VPLMN.
  • UE_A10 can be sent by including the SM message (for example, PDU session establishment request message) in the registration request message, or by sending the SM message (for example, PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message.
  • the PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
  • 5G AN120 When 5G AN120 (or gNB) receives an RRC message including a registration request message, it selects the AMF to which the registration request message is transferred (S602).
  • the 5G AN120 (or gNB) can select AMF based on one or more identification information contained in the registration request message and / or the RRC message including the registration request message. Specifically, 5GAN (or gNB) may select new AMF141 to which the registration request message is sent based on the first identification information.
  • 5G AN120 may select an AMF that supports a function corresponding to the ability information indicated by the first identification information based on the first identification information.
  • the 5GAN corresponds to the UE capability information indicated by the first identification information, and is included in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information, PLMNID and /.
  • an AMF having a function for generating and transmitting information combining PLMN's access technology and PLMN-supported NSSAI (S-NSSAI) may be selected.
  • the selection method of AMF is not limited to this, and 5GAN (or gNB) may select AMF based on other conditions. 5GAN (or gNB) extracts the registration request message from the received RRC message and forwards the registration request message to the selected new AMF (S604). If the first identification information is not included in the registration request message but is included in the RRC message, the identification information included in the RRC message is transferred to the selected AMF (new AMF141) together with the registration request message. May be good (S604).
  • the new AMF141 When the new AMF141 receives the registration request message, it can execute the first condition determination.
  • the first conditional determination is for determining whether or not the network (or new AMF141) accepts the UE request.
  • new AMF141 executes the procedure from S606 to S612 when the first condition determination is true.
  • new AMF141 may execute the procedure of S610 without executing the procedure of S606 to S608 when the first condition determination is false.
  • the new AMF141 may request the UE context from the old AMF142 and determine the first condition after receiving the UE context from the old AMF142 (S606, S608). In that case, new AMF141 may execute S610 and / or S612 if the first condition determination is true. On the other hand, new AMF141 may execute S610 when the first condition determination is false.
  • the control message transmitted and received by the S610 may be a registration acceptance message
  • the control message when the first condition determination is false, the control message may be a registration acceptance message.
  • the control message transmitted and received by the S610 may be a Registration reject message.
  • the first condition determination is the reception of the registration request message and / or each identification information contained in the registration request message, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy, and It may be executed based on / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by AMF.
  • the first condition determination is true, and if the network does not allow the UE request, the first condition determination may be false. Also, if the network to which the UE is registered and / or the devices in the network support the functions required by the UE, the first condition determination is true and does not support the functions required by the UE. In this case, the first condition determination may be false. Further, if the transmitted / received identification information is permitted, the first conditional determination may be true, and if the transmitted / received identification information is not permitted, the first conditional determination may be false.
  • the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI received by the AMF is the information that identifies the slice that requires the NSSAA procedure
  • the result of the NSSAA procedure of the S-NSSAI that the AMF corresponds to the UE is successful.
  • the first condition determination may be true if it is remembered to be. Alternatively, if there is no S-NSSAI allowed for the UE and there is no plan to assign allowed NSSAI to the UE in the future, the first condition determination may be false.
  • the first condition determination may be true if it can be expected that the allowed NSSAI will be assigned to the UE in the future.
  • the first condition determination may be true or false.
  • the new AMF141 executes the procedures of S606 and S608, and the new AMF141 is included in the message received from the UE_A10. If the AMF shown in the identification information is new AMF141, the procedure of S606 and S608 is not executed. In other words, if an AMF change occurs due to this procedure, the procedures for S606 and S608 will be executed, and if no change for AMF occurs, the procedures for S606 and S608 will be skipped.
  • new AMF141 sends a UE context request message to old AMF142 (S606).
  • the old AMF142 sends the UE context to the new AMF141 based on the received UE context request message.
  • new AMF141 creates a UE context based on the received UE context.
  • the UE context sent from new AMF141 to old AMF142 may include UEID and allowed NSSAI. Further, the UE context may include configured NSSAI and / or rejected NSSAI, NSSAI and / or pending NSSAI, and / or a first NSSAI. Also, allowed NSSAI and / or configured NSSAI and / or rejected NSSAI and / or pending NSSAI and / or first NSSAI included in the UE context, and S-NSSAI included in each NSSAI are to the UE. Information on whether or not the notification has been completed may be linked.
  • information on S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA procedure, and / or information indicating that the NSSAA procedure has been completed for the UE, that authentication has succeeded, and / or that authentication has failed. May be included.
  • the information of S-NSSAI that requires management of the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice, and / or the information indicating that the maximum number of UEs has been reached, and / or the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice have been reached.
  • Information indicating whether or not it may be included.
  • Information on the characteristics of these S-NSSAIs may be managed as one piece of information. Specifically, whether or not the network requires NSSAA for each S-NSSAI and whether or not NSSAA is successful. , Information indicating whether or not the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice needs to be managed and whether or not the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice has been reached may be stored in association with each other.
  • the new AMF141 may send a control message to the UE based on the determination of the first condition determination and / or based on the reception of the UE context from the old AMF142 (S610).
  • the control message may be a registration acceptance message or a registration refusal message. The case where the control message sent to the UE is the registration acceptance message will be described below.
  • the new AMF141 may send the control message including at least one or more identification information out of the second to fourth identification information.
  • the new AMF141 may indicate that the network supports each function by transmitting these identification information and / or control messages, or may indicate that the UE request has been accepted. It may indicate that it does not allow or support the request from the UE, or it may indicate information that combines these. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
  • the information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received as the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
  • the second identification information may be the ability information indicating that the new AMF141 and / or the core network supports the function corresponding to the ability information indicated by the first identification information received from the UE.
  • the new AMF141 also indicates that the new AMF141 and / or the core network has the capabilities indicated by the second identification by including the third and / or fourth identification in the registration acceptance message. May be good. In other words, new AMF141 does not have to include the second identification information if it includes the third and / or 4 identification information in the registration acceptance message.
  • new AMF141 must not transmit the 3rd and / or 4th identification information if it does not receive the 1st identification information from the UE. In other words, if the new AMF141 does not receive the first identification information from the UE, the third and / or fourth identification information may be prohibited.
  • the new AMF141 When the new AMF141 receives the first identification information from the UE, it may send at least one of the second to fourth identification information by including it in the control message.
  • the new AMF141 may transmit at least one of the third identification information and / or the identification information of 4 when the setting information of the UE is updated.
  • the new AMF141 may further include the configured NSSAI and / or allowed NSSAI, and / or rejected NSSAI, and / or pending NSSAI, and / or the first NSSAI in the control message and transmit it to UE_A10.
  • new AMF141 does not allow S-NSSAI (allowed NSSAI) to the UE when sending a control message, but if there is a plan to execute the NSSAA procedure after the completion of this procedure or in parallel with this procedure, or with the UE If the NSSAA procedure is being executed between networks, or if the pending NSSAI is included in the control message and sent, an empty value may be included in the allowed NSSAI and sent.
  • S-NSSAI allowed NSSAI
  • new AMF141 does not allow S-NSSAI (allowed NSSAI) to UE when sending a control message, but when including the 10th identification information in the control message, and before this procedure, the 1st NSSAI is sent to UE. If notified, an empty value may be included in allowed NSSAI and sent.
  • the 15th identification information may be included in the control message together.
  • UE_A10 receives a control message and / or one or more of the 10th to 15th identification information from the network. More specifically, the UE receives a control message and / or one or more of the 10th to 15th identification information from new AMF141.
  • UE_A10 may recognize the received information based on the reception of at least one of the 10th to 15th identification information. Specifically, UE_A10 has reached the maximum number of UEs to be connected per slice, so that S-NSSAI indicated by the tenth identification information and / or S-NSSAI indicated by the fourteenth identification information, and / Alternatively, it may be recognized that the transmission of the MM message using the S-NSSAI related to the mapped S-NSSAI indicated by the fifteenth identification information and / or the transmission of the SM message is temporarily prohibited. .
  • the MM procedure may be a registration request message
  • the SM message may be a PDU session establishment request message.
  • UE_A10 may perform the following operations based on the reception of at least one or more of the identification information 2 to 4 and / or the reception of the control message.
  • UE_A10 recognizes that by receiving one or more of the second to fourth identification information, the network supports the function corresponding to the UE capability information indicated by the first identification information. You may.
  • the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information When UE_A10 receives the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information without receiving the second identification information, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is extended. It may be recognized, stored, and processed as an unextended SOR transparent container information element or an unextended allowed NSSAI.
  • UE_A10 may store or update these. For example, if this procedure is an initial registration procedure, or if the UE does not store or retain the third and / or fourth identification information, they may be stored. Also, for example, if this procedure is a registration procedure for renewal, or the UE has already received or stored or preconfigured the information contained in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. If it is retained, it may be updated by overwriting or adding it with the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information newly received by this procedure.
  • the third identification information is an extended SOR transparent container information element
  • UE_A10 obtains one or more pieces of information shown in the third identification information based on the reception of the third identification information.
  • the old SOR transparent container information element may be deleted.
  • the third identification information is an extended allowed NSSAI
  • UE_A10 stores one or more pieces of information shown in the third identification information based on the reception of the third identification information. Specifically, UE_A10 may update allowed NSSAI based on the reception of the third identification information. Furthermore, if UE_A10 already remembers allowed NSSAI, the old allowed NSSAI may be deleted.
  • UE_A10 is the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI shown in the third identification information based on the reception of the third identification information. May be stored in association with the current PLMN and access type. Further, UE_A10 may store the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI in association with the supported PLMN list.
  • UE_A10 may store the received SOR transparent container information element based on the reception of the fourth identification information.
  • UE_A10 may store the received allowed NSSAI based on the reception of the fourth identification information.
  • the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is the SOR transparent container information element of the AMF or UDM or SOR-AF or other core network device that received the first identification information from the UE.
  • the UE may be new information generated by associating each PLMN that supports S-NSSAI (s) included in the permitted NSSAI (allowed NSSAI), or SOR transparent container information.
  • the information may be generated by expanding or changing the element. Specifically, this association is made in addition to the association between the PLMN ID recorded in the PLMN ID and access technology list (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations) included in the SOR transparent container information element, and the PLMN ID.
  • a SOR transparent container information element that has one or more S-NSSAIs included in the allowed NSSAI or allowed NSSAI that are supported for each, and one or more NSSAIs that are allowed PLMN ID, access technology, and UE as a set of information.
  • it may be configured as an extended list of PLMN ID and access technology lists (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations).
  • the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is for each S-NSSAI in which the AMF or UDM or other core network device that has received the first identification information from the UE is included in the allowed NSSAI.
  • It may be new information generated by associating with the PLMN ID of one or more VPLMNs that support S-NSSAI, or it may be information generated by extending or changing allowed NSSAI. ..
  • it may be configured as an extended list of allowed NSSAI with PLMN IDs supporting these S-NSSAI as one set of information.
  • the AMF may not include the allowed NSSAI, and may include the third identification information instead of the allowed NSSAI.
  • the UE that receives the third identification information recognizes that the third identification information is information including allowed NSAAI, and uses the information included in the third identification information as allowed NSSAI in the subsequent various processes. You may.
  • AMF determines which identification information to be included in the control message among the second to fourth identification information, each received identification information and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and / or. Selections and decisions may be made based on operator policy and / or network status and / or user registration information and / or context held by AMF.
  • the AMF either sends the registration acceptance message with the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment acceptance message), or sends the SM message along with the registration acceptance message (eg, PDU session establishment). Acceptance message) can be sent.
  • this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message. Further, this transmission method may be executed when an SM message (for example, a PDU session establishment request message) is transmitted together with the registration request message. By performing such a transmission method, AMF can indicate that the procedure for SM has been accepted in the registration procedure.
  • AMF also receives each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information and / or operator policy and / or network status and / or user registration information and / or It may be shown that the UE request has been accepted by sending the registration acceptance message based on the context held by the AMF, or the UE request has been rejected by sending the registration refusal message. May be indicated.
  • the UE receives the control message via 5GAN (gNB) (S608).
  • the control message is a registration acceptance message
  • the UE recognizes that the UE request by the registration request message has been accepted and the contents of various identification information contained in the registration acceptance message by receiving the registration acceptance message. can do.
  • the control message is a registration refusal message
  • the UE receives the registration refusal message, so that the UE's request by the registration request message is rejected, and the contents of various identification information included in the registration refusal message. Can be recognized.
  • the UE may recognize that the request of the UE has been rejected if the control message is not received even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after transmitting the registration request message.
  • the UE can further send a registration completion message to AMF via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the registration acceptance message when the control message is a registration acceptance message (S610).
  • gNB 5GAN
  • the UE may send the registration completion message including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate that the procedure for SM has been completed.
  • the registration completion message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
  • AMF receives a registration completion message via 5G AN (gNB) (S612).
  • each device completes this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message.
  • each device may complete the registration procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message.
  • each device may transition or maintain the state in which the UE is registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state or 5GMM-REGISTERED state) based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message. , Transition or maintenance to the state where the UE is not registered in the network (RM_DEREGISTERED state, or 5GMM-DEREGISTERED state) on the access that received the registration refusal message to the current PLMN based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message. You may. Further, the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the transmission / reception of the registration completion message or the completion of the registration procedure.
  • each device may perform processing based on the information sent and received in the registration procedure based on the completion of the registration procedure. For example, when sending and receiving information indicating that a part of the UE's request has been rejected, the reason why the UE's request has been rejected may be recognized. Further, each device may perform this procedure again based on the reason why the UE request is rejected, or may perform the registration procedure for the core network_A or another cell.
  • the UE may store the identification information received with the registration acceptance message and / or the registration refusal message based on the completion of the registration procedure, or may recognize the network decision.
  • the UE may delete one or more NSSAIs to be stored based on the completion of the registration procedure.
  • UE_A10 is the first to remember when UE_A10 transitions to the unregistered state on both accesses (3GPP access and non-3GPP access) to the current PLMN based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the rejected NSSAI and / or the third rejected NSSAI and / or the first NSSAI may be deleted.
  • UE_A10 will be registered in the new registration area when UE_A10 transitions to the unregistered state on certain access (3GPP access and non-3GPP access) to the current PLMN based on the completion of this procedure. If successful, or if UE_A10 transitions to an unregistered or registered state on a given access as a result of performing a registration procedure in a new registration area, UE_A10 will have the current PLMN and the current registration area, and / Alternatively, the access type and the second rejected NSSAI associated with it may be deleted.
  • each device may start the registration procedure again based on the expiration or stop of the backoff timer.
  • each device may start the registration procedure again based on the update of the stored NSSAI.
  • each device may start the SM procedure by sending and receiving SM messages based on the transition or maintenance of the UE registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state or 5GMM-REGISTERED state).
  • the update procedure updates the information (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations) stored by UE_A10 based on the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information received by UE_A10 in the registration procedure in Chapter 3.2. It may be a network-led or UE-led procedure for doing so. Specifically, registration procedures for renewal of registration at regular or arbitrary timings, and / or UE configuration update procedures, and / or network-led NAS transport procedures, and / Alternatively, it may be a UE-led NAS transport procedure.
  • the UE_A10 receives the new third identification information and / or the fourth identification information from the core network, and the UE_A10 has already received and stored the third identification information. It may be a procedure for updating the identification information and / or the information based on the fourth identification information (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations).
  • the update of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is performed by the core network in the DL NAS transport message of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information.
  • Information based on the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information (list of preferred PLMN / access technology) that is transmitted to UE_A10 including the identification information and received by UE_A10 that has already been received and stored. It may be a procedure to update combinations).
  • the method of updating the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information based on the reception of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information by the UE may be the same as the registration procedure.
  • the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure for the UE to provide each information to the core network.
  • the information provided may include a transparent container information element.
  • the transparent container information element may be an extended transparent container information element.
  • the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure initiated by the UE sending a ULNAS transport message to the AMF. Further, the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure that is triggered by a change in the state of the UE, a change in the setting of the UE, or the like. Further, the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure started by an instruction from a higher layer.
  • the network-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure for the core network to provide each information to the UE.
  • the information provided may include a transparent container information element.
  • the transparent container information element may be an extended transparent container information element.
  • the network-driven NAS transport procedure may be a procedure started by AMF sending a DLNAS transport message to the UE. Further, the network-driven NAS transport procedure may be a procedure started based on the reception of the ULNAS transport message. Conversely, the network-driven NAS transport procedure may be a procedure that is started based on a trigger other than the reception of the ULNAS transport message. For example, the network-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure that is triggered by a change in network status, a change in network settings, or the like.
  • This procedure is a procedure for updating the UE setting information under the initiative of the core network.
  • This procedure may be a procedure for mobility management that the network takes the initiative to execute for the UE registered in the network.
  • devices in the core network such as AMF may start this procedure based on the update of network settings and / or the update of operator policy.
  • the trigger of this procedure may be the detection of the mobility of the UE, the detection of the state change of the UE and / or the access network and / or the core network, or the state change of the network slice. It may be. Further, the trigger of this procedure may be the reception of a request from the DN and / or the application server of the DN, a change in network settings, or a change in operator policy. .. Further, the trigger of this procedure may be the expiration of the timer being executed.
  • the triggers for the devices in the core network to start this procedure are not limited to these.
  • this procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed. Further, this procedure may be executed at any timing as long as each device has established a 5GMM context and / or each device is in the 5GMM connection mode.
  • each device sends and receives a message containing identification information for changing the setting information of the UE and / or identification information for stopping or changing the function executed by the UE during this procedure. May be good. Further, each device may update the setting information to the setting instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure, or may start the behavior instructed by the network.
  • the UE may update the setting information of the UE based on the control information transmitted and received by this procedure. Further, the UE may stop the function being executed or start a new function as the setting information of the UE is updated. In other words, the device in the core network leads this procedure, and further, by transmitting the control message and control information of this procedure to the UE, the UE setting information that can be identified by using these control information can be obtained. , UE may update. Further, the device in the core network may stop the function executed by the UE by updating the setting information of the UE, or may cause the UE to start a new function.
  • AMF140 starts the UE setting update procedure by sending a configuration update command message to UE_A10 via 5G AN120 (or gNB) (S700).
  • the AMF140 may send the setting update command message including the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information.
  • the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information included in the setting update command message is included in the registration acceptance message in the registration procedure described in Chapter 3.2 by the UE, and is received and stored from the AMF. It may be a new value that updates the identification information and / or the fourth identification information of.
  • the AMF140 has not received the registration request message containing the first identification information from the UE in the registration procedure described in Chapter 3.2, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification in this procedure. Do not send information.
  • the AMF140 also includes each identification information received, and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and whether to include the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information in the setting update command message. It may be selected and determined based on / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by the AMF140.
  • AMF140 also receives each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information and / or operator policy and / or network status and / or user registration information and / or.
  • a request for updating the setting information of UE_A10 may be indicated by sending a setting update command message based on the context held by the AMF140.
  • the UE may update the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information stored in the UE based on the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information.
  • the method of updating the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information based on the reception of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information by the UE may be the same as the registration procedure.
  • the UE sends a configuration update complete message to the AMF140 via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the configuration update command message based on the identification information contained in the configuration update command message. May (S702).
  • AMF140 receives a setting update completion message via 5GAN (gNB) (S702).
  • gNB 5GAN
  • each device completes this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the setting update command message and / or the setting update completion message.
  • each device may perform processing based on the information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. For example, when the update information for the setting information is transmitted and received, each device may update the setting information. Furthermore, when sending and receiving information indicating that the registration procedure needs to be performed, UE_A10 may start the registration procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
  • UE_A10 may store the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information received together with the setting information command message based on the completion of this procedure, and may recognize the network decision. .. In addition, the UE may execute each procedure based on the stored information based on the completion of this procedure.
  • the device in the core network can instruct the UE to update the setting information already stored or applied by the UE, and the UE executes the command. You can instruct to stop or change the function you are using.
  • PLMN selection is when UE_A10 needs to switch from the currently registered and / or connected PLMN (here HPLMN) to another PLMN (VPLMN) due to movement (mobility), or in an area other than HPLMN. It may be a process executed by the UE when the power is turned on.
  • the PLMN selection may be based on the third and / or fourth identification information received and stored by the UE_A10 in the registration and / or renewal procedures, and the identification used by the UE_A10 in the HPLMN. It may be a UE process that selects a combination of PLMN (VPLMN) ID and / or access technology that supports S-NSSAI and / or NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) that supports PLMN.
  • VPN PLMN
  • S-NSSAI NSSAI
  • the PLMN selection may be executed in the automatic mode (Automatic mode), which is automatically performed, or can be used as indicated by UE_A10. It may be executed in the manual mode (Manual mode) manually performed by the user based on the PLMN.
  • Automatic mode is used in the registration procedure to be executed next by selecting the combination with the highest priority from the combination of PLMN ID and access technology and / or NSSAI (1 or more S-NSSAI). You may.
  • the priority may be the order in which the combination of PLMN and access technology and / or NSSAI (one or more S-NSSAI) is stored, and the first stored PLMN ID and access technology and / or The PLMN ID included in the combination of NSSAI (1 or more S-NSSAI) may have the highest priority.
  • the PLMN selection is based on the S-NSSAI that establishes a PDU session after the UE executes the registration procedure based on the PLMN selection. It may be the processing of the UE that selects.
  • the PLMN selection executed when the power is turned on in an area other than the HPLMN is included in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information and / or these that the UE has already received and stored. It may be executed based on the information obtained.
  • the UE may select the highest priority PLMN ID from the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information, and execute the registration procedure based on the selected PLMN ID.
  • the registration procedure may be executed based on NSSAI (allowed NSSAI) permitted by networks other than the above without selecting the PLMN ID, and the operation of the UE is not limited to these.
  • the UE after executing the PLMN selection may execute the registration procedure to the PLMN of the connection destination selected and determined based on the PLMN selection.
  • this registration procedure may be a registration procedure executed by mobility or an initial registration procedure.
  • An embodiment of one aspect of the invention may be a combination of one or more procedures described in Chapter 3.
  • the registration procedure (S800) described in Chapter 3 is completed, the network or UE-led update procedure (S802) may or may not be executed. You may.
  • the renewal procedure may be started at any time by the UE or the network, may be executed based on a setting or policy change in the UE or the network, or the UE subscription information or the UE subscription information stored by the network. , May be implemented based on changes in roaming agreements with other networks (PLMN), or slice support for other networks.
  • PLMN roaming agreements with other networks
  • each device in the UE and / or core network may transition to the first state (S804).
  • the UE_A10 and each core network device may be in the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state), and / or in the registration procedure (S800) and / or the renewal procedure (S804).
  • UE_A10 may be in a state of receiving and storing the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information.
  • the first state (S804) may be a state in which UE_A10 has received the second identification information.
  • the third identification information may be an extended SOR transparent container information element and / or an extended allowed NSSAI, and is based on the first identification information transmitted by UE_A10 to the core network in the initial registration procedure. You may.
  • UE_A10 in the first state may select PLMN (S806) when it is necessary to switch to another PLMN due to movement (mobility) or when the power is turned on in an area other than HPLMN.
  • the PLMN selection may be based on the third and / or fourth identification information, which automatically implements the PLMN (VPLMN) ID that supports the specific S-NSSAI used by the UE_A10 on the HPLMN. It may be carried out manually by the user of UE_A10.
  • PLMN PLMN
  • a higher PLMN ID may be selected based on the priority or the like.
  • the priority may be the order in which the PLMN ID and access technology and / or the combination of one or more S-NSSAIs are stored, and the first stored PLMN ID and access technology and / or one or more are stored.
  • the S-NSSAI combination may have the highest priority.
  • the PLMN ID of the connection destination is selected based on the PLMN selection, and the determined UE_A10 may execute the registration procedure (S808) for the selected and determined connection destination PLMN, and this registration procedure is performed by mobility. It may be a registration procedure to be executed, or it may be an initial registration procedure. In addition, the registration procedure for VPLM (PLMN # 2 in Fig. 8) may be the same as the registration procedure described in Chapter 3, or even if the registration request message does not include the first identification information. good.
  • the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information has described an embodiment in which UE_A10 receives and / or updates at HPLMN by a registration procedure and / or an update procedure.
  • the VPLMN may also receive and / or update the third and / or fourth identification information by the registration procedure and / or the renewal procedure.
  • the program that operates in the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls the Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate the computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention.
  • the program or information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
  • volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
  • the program for realizing the function of the embodiment according to the present invention may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by loading the program recorded on this recording medium into a computer system and executing it.
  • the "computer system” as used herein is a computer system built into a device, and includes hardware such as an operating system and peripheral devices.
  • the "computer-readable recording medium” is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another recording medium that can be read by a computer. May be good.
  • each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiment can be implemented or executed in an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits.
  • Electrical circuits designed to perform the functions described herein are general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or others. Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or a combination thereof.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller, or a state machine.
  • the electric circuit described above may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit appears due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or a plurality of aspects of the present invention can use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
  • the invention of the present application is not limited to the above-described embodiment.
  • an example of the device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, for example, an AV device or a kitchen device. It can be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as cleaning / washing equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other living equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and includes design changes and the like within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Further, the present invention can be variously modified within the scope of the claims, and the technical scope of the present invention also includes embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in the different embodiments. Is done. In addition, the elements described in each of the above embodiments include a configuration in which elements having the same effect are replaced with each other.

Abstract

Communication means are provided to realize a function relating to management of information for appropriate PLMN selection, taking into consideration network slice support for each PLMN in 5GS. Provided are a method for acquisition of information in an initial registration of UE, procedures for updating information, and PLMN selection based on information, and communication means, to realize management of information for appropriate PLMN selection, taking into consideration network slice support by a PLMN at a relocation destination of UE.

Description

UE(User Equipment)UE (User Equipment)
 本発明は、UE(User Equipment)に関する。本願は、2020年4月24日に日本に出願された特願2020-077041号に基づき優先権を主張し、その内容をここに援用する。 The present invention relates to UE (User Equipment). The present application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-077041 filed in Japan on April 24, 2020, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 近年の移動通信システムの標準化活動を行う3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project)は、LTE(Long Term Evolution)のシステムアーキテクチャであるSAE(System Architecture Evolution)の検討を行っている。 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which is engaged in standardization activities for mobile communication systems in recent years, is studying SAE (System Architecture Evolution), which is the system architecture of LTE (Long Term Evolution).
 また、近年3GPPでは、次世代移動通信システムである5G (5th Generation) 移動通信システムの次世代通信技術やシステムアーキテクチャの検討も行っており、特に、5G移動通信システムを実現するシステムとして、5GS(5G System)の仕様化を行っている(非特許文献1から4を参照)。5GSでは、多種多様な端末をセルラーネットワークに接続する為の技術課題を抽出し、解決策を仕様化している。 In recent years, 3GPP has also been studying the next-generation communication technology and system architecture of 5G (5th Generation) mobile communication systems, which are next-generation mobile communication systems. In particular, 5GS (5G) is a system that realizes 5G mobile communication systems. 5G System) is being specified (see Non-Patent Documents 1 to 4). 5GS extracts technical issues for connecting a wide variety of terminals to cellular networks and specifies solutions.
 5GS(5G System)では、多種多様なサービスを提供するために、新たなコアネットワークである5GCN(5G Core Network)が検討されている。 In 5GS (5G System), a new core network, 5GCN (5G Core Network), is being considered in order to provide a wide variety of services.
 さらに、5Gでは、特定のサービスタイプや、特定のグループの為に、特定のネットワーク機能や特定のネットワーク特性を提供する、論理ネットワークであるネットワークスライスが規定された。例えば、ネットワークスライスは、低遅延機能を備える端末の為に提供される論理ネットワークであってもよいし、IoT(Internet of Things)に用いられるセンサー端末の為に提供される論理ネットワークであってもよい。 Furthermore, 5G defines network slices, which are logical networks that provide specific network functions and specific network characteristics for specific service types and specific groups. For example, the network slice may be a logical network provided for a terminal having a low latency function, or may be a logical network provided for a sensor terminal used for IoT (Internet of Things). good.
 3GPPでは、更に、ネットワークスライスに関連する更なる機能を検討するために、eNS(Enhancement of Network Slicing)の検討が行われている。3GPPでは、eNSのフェーズ2の検討として、UEが移動先において、ホームモバイルネットワーク(HPLMN)で使用していたスライスのサポートを考慮した適切な訪問先モバイルネットワーク(VPLMN)の選択のための機能の追加を検討している(非特許文献5を参照)。 In 3GPP, eNS (Enhancement of Network Slicing) is being studied in order to further study further functions related to network slicing. 3GPP considers Phase 2 of the eNS as a feature for selecting the appropriate destination mobile network (VPLMN) in consideration of the slice support that the UE used in the home mobile network (HPLMN) at the destination. Considering addition (see Non-Patent Document 5).
 しかし、上記の要求を満たすための実現方法はまだ明確になっていない。 However, the implementation method to meet the above requirements has not yet been clarified.
 本発明の一態様は、以上のような事情を鑑みてなされたものであり、5GSにおけるeNSのための機能の実現方法を提供することである。 One aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is to provide a method for realizing a function for eNS in 5GS.
 本発明の一態様の、UE(User Equipment)は、送受信部と、制御部と、記憶部とを備え、前記送受信部は、第1のPLMN(Public Land Mobile Networks)において、前記第1のPLMNで使用を許可された第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information)と、前記第1のS-NSSAIと関連付けられた第2のPLMNを示す第2のPLMN IDとを含む登録受諾メッセージをコアネットワークから受信し、前記記憶部は、前記第2のPLMN IDと前記第1のS-NSSAIとを関連付けて記憶し、前記制御部は、前記第1のS-NSSAIに関連付けられた前記第2のPLMN IDに基づいて、前記第2のPLMNを選択可能であり、前記制御部は、前記登録受諾メッセージの受信に基づき、登録状態に遷移し、前記送受信部は、前記登録受諾メッセージを受信した後、前記第1のPLMNにおいて、前記第1のPLMNで使用を許可された第1のS-NSSAIと、前記第1のS-NSSAIと関連付けられた第3のPLMNを示す第3のPLMN IDとを含む設定更新コマンドを受信したときは、前記記憶部は、前記第3のPLMN IDと前記第1のS-NSSAIとを関連付けて記憶し、前記制御部は、前記第1のS-NSSAIに関連付けられた前記第3のPLMN IDに基づいて、前記第3のPLMNを選択する、ことを特徴とする。 The UE (User Equipment) according to one aspect of the present invention includes a transmission / reception unit, a control unit, and a storage unit, and the transmission / reception unit is the first PLMN (Public Land Mobile Networks) in the first PLMN. Registration acceptance message containing the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) permitted to be used in the first S-NSSAI and the second PLMN ID indicating the second PLMN associated with the first S-NSSAI. Is received from the core network, the storage unit stores the second PLMN ID in association with the first S-NSSAI, and the control unit associates the first S-NSSAI with the first S-NSSAI. The second PLMN can be selected based on the second PLMN ID, the control unit transitions to the registration state based on the reception of the registration acceptance message, and the transmission / reception unit sends the registration acceptance message. After receiving, in the first PLMN, the first S-NSSAI permitted to be used in the first PLMN and the third PLMN associated with the first S-NSSAI are shown. When the setting update command including the PLMN ID is received, the storage unit stores the third PLMN ID and the first S-NSSAI in association with each other, and the control unit stores the first S. -It is characterized in that the third PLMN is selected based on the third PLMN ID associated with the NSSAI.
 本発明の一態様によれば、5GSにおいて、eNSのサポートが可能となり、UEが移動先において、ホームモバイルネットワーク(HPLMN)で使用していたスライスのサポートを考慮した訪問先モバイルネットワーク(VPLMN)の選択が可能となる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, eNS support is possible in 5GS, and the visited mobile network (VPLMN) considering the support of slices used by the UE in the home mobile network (HPLMN) at the destination. You can choose.
移動通信システム(EPS/5GS)の概略を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the outline of the mobile communication system (EPS / 5GS). 移動通信システム(EPS/5GS)の詳細構成を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the detailed structure of the mobile communication system (EPS / 5GS). UEの装置構成を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the apparatus configuration of UE. 5GSにおけるアクセスネットワーク装置(gNB)の構成を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the structure of the access network apparatus (gNB) in 5GS. 5GSにおけるコアネットワーク装置(AMF/SMF/UPF)の構成を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the structure of the core network apparatus (AMF / SMF / UPF) in 5GS. 登録手続きを説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the registration procedure. UEの設定の変更/更新手続きを説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the change / update procedure of a UE setting. 本発明の一態様における実施形態を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the embodiment in one aspect of this invention.
 以下、図面を参照して本発明の一態様を実施する為に最良の形態について説明する。尚、本実施形態では1例として、本発明の一態様を適用した場合の移動通信システムの実施形態について説明する。 Hereinafter, the best mode for carrying out one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, as an example, an embodiment of a mobile communication system when one aspect of the present invention is applied will be described.
 [1. システムの概要]
 まず、図1は、各実施形態で使用される移動通信システム1の概略を説明する為の図であり、図2は、その移動通信システム1の詳細構成を説明する為の図である。
[1. System overview]
First, FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the mobile communication system 1 used in each embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a detailed configuration of the mobile communication system 1.
 図1には、移動通信システム1は、UE_A10、アクセスネットワーク_A80、コアネットワーク_A90、PDN(Packet Data Network)_A5、アクセスネットワーク_B120、コアネットワーク_B190、DN(Data Network)_A6により構成されることが記載されている。 In FIG. 1, the mobile communication system 1 is composed of UE_A10, access network_A80, core network_A90, PDN (Packet Data Network) _A5, access network _B120, core network _B190, and DN (Data Network) _A6. It is stated that
 以下では、これらの装置・機能について、UE、アクセスネットワーク_A、コアネットワーク_A、PDN、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DN等のように、記号を省略して記載する場合がある。 In the following, these devices / functions may be described by omitting symbols such as UE, access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, DN, etc. ..
 また、図2には、UE_A10、E-UTRAN80、MME40、SGW35、PGW-U30、PGW-C32、PCRF60、HSS50、5G AN120、AMF140、UPF130、SMF132、PCF160、UDM150、N3IWF170等の装置・機能、及びこれらの装置・機能を互いに接続するインターフェースが記載されている。 In addition, Fig. 2 shows the devices / functions of UE_A10, E-UTRAN80, MME40, SGW35, PGW-U30, PGW-C32, PCRF60, HSS50, 5G AN120, AMF140, UPF130, SMF132, PCF160, UDM150, N3IWF170, etc. An interface for connecting these devices / functions to each other is described.
 以下では、これらの装置・機能について、UE、E-UTRAN、MME、SGW、PGW-U、PGW-C、PCRF、HSS、5G AN、AMF、UPF、SMF、PCF、UDM、N3IWF等のように、記号を省略して記載する場合がある。 In the following, these devices / functions are described as UE, E-UTRAN, MME, SGW, PGW-U, PGW-C, PCRF, HSS, 5GAN, AMF, UPF, SMF, PCF, UDM, N3IWF, etc. , The symbol may be omitted.
 尚、4GシステムであるEPS(Evolved Packet System)は、アクセスネットワーク_A及びコアネットワーク_Aを含んで構成されるが、さらにUE及び/又はPDNが含まれてもよい。また、5Gシステムである5GS(5G System)は、UE、アクセスネットワーク_B及びコアネットワーク_Bを含んで構成されるが、さらにDNが含まれてもよい。 The EPS (Evolved Packet System), which is a 4G system, is configured to include the access network_A and the core network_A, but may further include the UE and / or PDN. Further, 5GS (5G System), which is a 5G system, is configured to include a UE, an access network_B, and a core network_B, but may further include a DN.
 UEは、3GPPアクセス(3GPPアクセスネットワーク、3GPP ANとも称する)及び/又はnon-3GPPアクセス(non-3GPPアクセスネットワーク、non-3GPP ANとも称する)を介して、ネットワークサービスに対して接続可能な装置である。UEは、携帯電話やスマートフォン等の無線通信が可能な端末装置であってよく、EPSにも5GSにも接続可能な端末装置であってよい。UEは、UICC(Universal Integrated Circuit Card)やeUICC(Embedded UICC)を備えてもよい。尚、UEのことをユーザ装置と表現してもよいし、端末装置と表現してもよい。 UE is a device that can connect to network services via 3GPP access (3GPP access network, also called 3GPP AN) and / or non-3GPP access (non-3GPP access network, also called non-3GPP AN). be. The UE may be a terminal device capable of wireless communication such as a mobile phone or a smartphone, and may be a terminal device capable of connecting to both EPS and 5GS. The UE may be provided with UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) or eUICC (Embedded UICC). The UE may be expressed as a user device or a terminal device.
 また、アクセスネットワーク_Aは、E-UTRAN(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)及び/又は無線LANアクセスネットワークに対応する。E-UTRANには、1以上のeNB(evolved Node B)45が配置される。尚、以下では、eNB45は、eNBのように記号を省略して記載する場合がある。また、複数のeNBがある場合は、各eNBは、例えばX2インターフェースにより、互いに接続されている。また、無線LANアクセスネットワークには、1以上のアクセスポイントが配置される。 In addition, the access network_A corresponds to E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) and / or wireless LAN access network. One or more eNB (evolved Node B) 45 are arranged in E-UTRAN. In the following, eNB45 may be described by omitting a symbol like eNB. When there are a plurality of eNBs, each eNB is connected to each other by, for example, an X2 interface. In addition, one or more access points are arranged in the wireless LAN access network.
 また、アクセスネットワーク_Bは、5Gアクセスネットワーク(5G AN)に対応する。5G ANは、NG-RAN(NG Radio Access Network)及び/又はnon-3GPP アクセスネットワークで構成される。NG-RANには、1以上のgNB(NR NodeB)122が配置される。尚、以下では、gNB122は、eNBのように記号を省略して記載する場合がある。gNBは、NR(New Radio)ユーザプレーンと制御プレーンをUEに提供するノードであり、5GCNに対してNGインターフェース(N2インターフェース又はN3インターフェースを含む)を介して接続するノードである。すなわち、gNBは、5GSのために新たに設計された基地局装置であり、4GシステムであるEPSで使用されていた基地局装置(eNB)とは異なる機能を有する。また、複数のgNBがある場合は、各gNBは、例えばXnインターフェースにより、互いに接続している。 In addition, access network_B corresponds to 5G access network (5G AN). 5GAN is composed of NG-RAN (NG Radio Access Network) and / or non-3GPP access network. One or more gNB (NR Node B) 122s are placed in the NG-RAN. In the following, gNB122 may be described by omitting symbols such as eNB. The gNB is a node that provides the NR (New Radio) user plane and control plane to the UE, and is a node that connects to the 5GCN via an NG interface (including an N2 interface or an N3 interface). That is, gNB is a base station device newly designed for 5GS, and has a function different from that of the base station device (eNB) used in EPS, which is a 4G system. When there are a plurality of gNBs, each gNB is connected to each other by, for example, an Xn interface.
 また、non-3GPP アクセスネットワークは、信頼できない非3GPP(untrusted non-3GPP)アクセスネットワークであってもよいし、信頼できる非3GPP(trusted non-3GPP)アクセスネットワークであってもよい。ここで、信頼できない非3GPPアクセスネットワークは、例えば公衆無線LANなど、アクセスネットワーク内でセキュリティ管理を行わないnon-3GPPアクセスネットワークであってよい。一方で、信頼できる非3GPPアクセスネットワークは、3GPPが規定するアクセスネットワークであってよく、TNAP(trusted non-3GPP access point)とTNGF(trusted non-3GPP Gateway function)を備えていてもよい。 Further, the non-3GPP access network may be an untrusted non-3GPP (untrusted non-3GPP) access network or a trusted non-3GPP (trusted non-3GPP) access network. Here, the unreliable non-3GPP access network may be a non-3GPP access network that does not perform security management in the access network, for example, a public wireless LAN. On the other hand, the reliable non-3GPP access network may be an access network defined by 3GPP, and may include TNAP (trusted non-3GPP access point) and TNGF (trusted non-3GPP Gateway function).
 また、以下では、E-UTRANやNG-RANは、3GPPアクセスと称することがある。また、無線LANアクセスネットワークやnon-3GPP ANは、non-3GPPアクセスと称することがある。また、アクセスネットワーク_Bに配置されるノードを、まとめてNG-RANノードとも称することがある。 In the following, E-UTRAN and NG-RAN may be referred to as 3GPP access. In addition, wireless LAN access network and non-3GPP AN may be referred to as non-3GPP access. In addition, the nodes arranged in the access network_B may be collectively referred to as NG-RAN nodes.
 また、以下では、アクセスネットワーク_A、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_B、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_Aに含まれる装置、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_Bに含まれる装置は、アクセスネットワーク、又はアクセスネットワーク装置と称する場合がある。 In the following, the devices included in the access network_A and / or the access network_B and / or the access network_A, and / or the devices included in the access network_B are the access network or the access network device. It may be called.
 また、コアネットワーク_Aは、EPC(Evolved Packet Core)に対応する。EPCには、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)、SGW(Serving Gateway)、PGW(Packet Data Network Gateway)-U、PGW-C、PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function)、HSS(Home Subscriber Server)等が配置される。 Also, the core network_A corresponds to EPC (Evolved Packet Core). EPC includes, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), SGW (Serving Gateway), PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) -U, PGW-C, PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function), HSS (Home Subscriber Server), etc. Be placed.
 また、コアネットワーク_Bは、5GCN(5G Core Network)に対応する。5GCNには、例えば、AMF(Access and Mobility Management Function)、UPF(User Plane Function)、SMF(Session Management Function)、PCF(Policy Control Function)、UDM(Unified Data Management)等が配置される。ここで、5GCNは、5GCと表現されてもよい。 In addition, core network_B corresponds to 5GCN (5G Core Network). For example, AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function), UPF (User Plane Function), SMF (Session Management Function), PCF (Policy Control Function), UDM (Unified Data Management), etc. are arranged in 5GCN. Here, 5GCN may be expressed as 5GC.
 また、以下では、コアネットワーク_A、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_Aに含まれる装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク_Bに含まれる装置は、コアネットワーク、又はコアネットワーク装置又はコアネットワーク内装置と称する場合がある。 In the following, the core network_A and / or the core network_B, the device included in the core network_A, and / or the device included in the core network_B are the core network, or the core network device or the core network. It may be called an internal device.
 コアネットワーク(コアネットワーク_A及び/又はコアネットワーク_B)は、アクセスネットワーク(アクセスネットワーク_A及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_B)と、PDN及び/又はDNとを接続した移動体通信事業者(Mobile Network Operator; MNO)が運用するIP移動通信ネットワークの事であってもよいし、移動通信システム1を運用、管理する移動体通信事業者の為のコアネットワークでもよいし、MVNO(Mobile Virtual Network Operator)や、MVNE(Mobile Virtual Network Enabler)等の仮想移動通信事業者や仮想移動体通信サービス提供者の為のコアネットワークでもよい。 The core network (core network_A and / or core network_B) is a mobile network operator (Mobile) that connects the access network (access network_A and / or access network_B) with the PDN and / or DN. It may be an IP mobile communication network operated by Network Operator; MNO), it may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages mobile communication system 1, or it may be an MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator). ), MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler), and other virtual mobile communication operators and virtual mobile communication service providers.
 コアネットワーク(コアネットワーク_A及び/又はコアネットワーク_B)と、アクセスネットワーク(アクセスネットワーク_A及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_B)は、移動体通信事業者毎に異なってもよい。 The core network (core network_A and / or core network_B) and the access network (access network_A and / or access network_B) may be different for each mobile communication carrier.
 また、図1では、PDNとDNが同一である場合が記載されているが、異なっていてもよい。PDNは、UEに通信サービスを提供するDN(Data Network)であってよい。尚、DNは、パケットデータサービス網として構成されてもよいし、サービス毎に構成されてもよい。さらに、PDNは、接続された通信端末を含んでもよい。従って、PDNと接続する事は、PDNに配置された通信端末やサーバ装置と接続する事であってもよい。さらに、PDNとの間でユーザデータを送受信する事は、PDNに配置された通信端末やサーバ装置とユーザデータを送受信する事であってもよい。尚、PDNのことをDNと表現してもよいし、DNのことをPDNと表現してもよい。 Also, in Fig. 1, the case where PDN and DN are the same is described, but they may be different. The PDN may be a DN (Data Network) that provides a communication service to the UE. The DN may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service. Further, the PDN may include a connected communication terminal. Therefore, connecting to the PDN may be connecting to a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN. Further, sending and receiving user data to and from the PDN may be sending and receiving user data to and from a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN. Note that PDN may be expressed as DN, and DN may be expressed as PDN.
 また、以下では、アクセスネットワーク_A、コアネットワーク_A、PDN、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNの少なくとも一部、及び/又はこれらに含まれる1以上の装置を、ネットワーク又はネットワーク装置と呼称する場合がある。つまり、ネットワーク及び/又はネットワーク装置が、メッセージを送受信する、及び/又は手続きを実行するということは、アクセスネットワーク_A、コアネットワーク_A、PDN、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNの少なくとも一部、及び/又はこれらに含まれる1以上の装置が、メッセージを送受信する、及び/又は手続きを実行することを意味する。 In the following, access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, at least a part of DN, and / or one or more devices included in these are referred to as a network or network device. It may be called. That is, the fact that the network and / or the network device sends and receives messages and / or executes the procedure means that the access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, and DN It means that at least a part and / or one or more devices included therein send and receive messages and / or perform procedures.
 また、UEは、アクセスネットワークに接続することができる。また、UEは、アクセスネットワークを介して、コアネットワークと接続する事ができる。さらに、UEは、アクセスネットワーク及びコアネットワークを介して、PDN又はDNに接続する事ができる。すなわち、UEは、PDN又はDNとの間で、ユーザデータを送受信(通信)する事ができる。ユーザデータを送受信する際は、IP(Internet Protocol)通信だけでなく、non-IP通信を用いてもよい。 Also, the UE can connect to the access network. The UE can also connect to the core network via the access network. In addition, the UE can connect to the PDN or DN via the access network and core network. That is, the UE can send and receive (communicate) user data with the PDN or DN. When sending and receiving user data, not only IP (Internet Protocol) communication but also non-IP communication may be used.
 ここで、IP通信とは、IPを用いたデータ通信の事であり、IPパケットにより、データの送受信が行われる。IPパケットは、IPヘッダとペイロード部で構成される。ペイロード部には、EPSに含まれる装置・機能や、5GSに含まれる装置・機能が送受信するデータが含まれてよい。また、non-IP通信とは、IPを用いないデータ通信の事であり、IPパケットの構造とは異なる形式により、データの送受信が行われる。例えば、non-IP通信は、IPヘッダが付与されていないアプリケーションデータの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信でもよいし、マックヘッダやEthernet(登録商標)フレームヘッダ等の別のヘッダを付与してUEが送受信するユーザデータを送受信してもよい。 Here, IP communication is data communication using IP, and data is transmitted and received by IP packets. An IP packet is composed of an IP header and a payload part. The payload section may include devices / functions included in EPS and data transmitted / received by devices / functions included in 5GS. In addition, non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and data is transmitted and received in a format different from the structure of IP packets. For example, non-IP communication may be data communication realized by sending and receiving application data to which an IP header is not added, or a UE can add another header such as a Mac header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header. User data to be sent and received may be sent and received.
 また、アクセスネットワーク_A、コアネットワーク_A、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、PDN_A、DN_Aには、図2に記載されない装置が構成されていてもよい。例えば、コアネットワーク_A及び/又はコアネットワーク_B及び/又はPDN_A及び/又はDN_Aには、AUSF(Authentication Server Function)やAAA(Authentication, authorization, and accounting)サーバ(AAA-S)が含まれてもよい。AAAサーバはコアネットワークの外に配置されてもよい。 Further, the access network_A, the core network_A, the access network_B, the core network_B, the PDN_A, and the DN_A may be configured with devices not shown in FIG. For example, core network_A and / or core network_B and / or PDN_A and / or DN_A includes AUSF (Authentication Server Function) and AAA (Authentication, authorization, and accounting) server (AAA-S). May be good. The AAA server may be located outside the core network.
 ここで、AUSFは、3GPPアクセス及びnon-3GPPアクセスに対する認証機能を備える、コアネットワーク装置である。具体的には、3GPPアクセス及び/又はnon-3GPPアクセスに対する認証の要求をUEから受信し、認証手続きを実行するネットワーク機能部である。 Here, AUSF is a core network device equipped with an authentication function for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access. Specifically, it is a network function unit that receives an authentication request for 3GPP access and / or non-3GPP access from the UE and executes the authentication procedure.
 また、AAAサーバは、AUSFと直接的または他のネットワーク装置を介して間接的に接続する、認証及び承認及び課金機能を備える、装置である。AAAサーバはコアネットワーク内のネットワーク装置であってもよい。なお、AAAサーバは、コアネットワーク_A及び/又はコアネットワーク_Bに含まれず、PLMNに含まれてもよい。つまり、AAAサーバはコアネットワーク装置であってもよいし、コアネットワークの外にある装置であってよい。例えば、AAAサーバは3rd Partyが管理する、PLMN内のサーバ装置であってもよい。 Also, the AAA server is a device that has authentication, approval, and billing functions that connects directly to AUSF or indirectly via other network devices. The AAA server may be a network device in the core network. The AAA server may not be included in the core network_A and / or the core network_B, but may be included in the PLMN. That is, the AAA server may be a core network device or a device outside the core network. For example, the AAA server may be a server device in the PLMN managed by the 3rd Party.
 なお、図2では、図の簡略化のため、各装置・機能は1つずつ記載したが、移動通信システム1には複数の同様の装置・機能が構成されてもよい。具体的には、移動通信システム1には複数のUE_A10、E-UTRAN80、MME40、SGW35、PGW-U30、PGW-C32、PCRF60、HSS50、5G AN120、AMF140、UPF130、SMF132、PCF160、及び/又はUDM150等の装置・機能が構成されていてもよい。 Although each device / function is described one by one in FIG. 2 for the sake of simplification of the figure, a plurality of similar devices / functions may be configured in the mobile communication system 1. Specifically, the mobile communication system 1 includes a plurality of UE_A10, E-UTRAN80, MME40, SGW35, PGW-U30, PGW-C32, PCRF60, HSS50, 5G AN120, AMF140, UPF130, SMF132, PCF160, and / or UDM150. Etc. may be configured.
 [2. 各装置の構成]
 次に、各実施形態で使用される各装置(UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置)の構成について、図を用いて説明する。尚、各装置は、物理的なハードウェアとして構成されてもよいし、汎用的なハードウェア上に構成された論理的な(仮想的な)ハードウェアとして構成されてもよいし、ソフトウェアとして構成されてもよい。また、各装置の持つ機能の少なくとも一部(全部を含む)が、物理的なハードウェア、論理的なハードウェア、ソフトウェアとして構成されてもよい。
[2. Configuration of each device]
Next, the configuration of each device (UE and / or access network device and / or core network device) used in each embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Each device may be configured as physical hardware, may be configured as logical (virtual) hardware configured on general-purpose hardware, or may be configured as software. May be done. Further, at least a part (including all) of the functions of each device may be configured as physical hardware, logical hardware, or software.
 尚、以下で登場する各装置・機能内の各記憶部(記憶部_A340、記憶部_A440、記憶部_B540、記憶部_A640、記憶部_B740)は、例えば、半導体メモリ、SSD(Solid State Drive)、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)等で構成されている。また、各記憶部は、出荷段階からもともと設定されていた情報だけでなく、自装置・機能以外の装置・機能(例えば、UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置、及び/又はPDN、及び/又はDN)との間で、送受信した各種の情報を記憶する事ができる。また、各記憶部は、後述する各種の通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶することができる。また、各記憶部は、これらの情報をUE毎に記憶してもよい。また、各記憶部は、5GSとEPSとの間のインターワークをした場合には、5GS及び/又はEPS内に含まれる装置・機能との間で送受信した制御メッセージやユーザデータを記憶することができる。このとき、N26インターフェースを介して送受信されたものだけでなく、N26インターフェースを介さずに送受信されたものも記憶することができる。 In addition, each storage unit (storage unit_A340, storage unit_A440, storage unit_B540, storage unit_A640, storage unit_B740) in each device / function appearing below may be, for example, a semiconductor memory or SSD (semiconductor memory). It consists of Solid State Drive), HDD (Hard Disk Drive), etc. In addition, each storage unit has not only the information originally set from the shipping stage, but also devices / functions other than its own device / function (for example, UE and / or access network device, and / or core network device, and /. Or PDN and / or DN) can store various information sent and received. In addition, each storage unit can store identification information, control information, flags, parameters, and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in various communication procedures described later. Further, each storage unit may store such information for each UE. In addition, each storage unit can store control messages and user data sent and received between 5GS and / or devices / functions included in EPS when interwork is performed between 5GS and EPS. can. At this time, not only those transmitted / received via the N26 interface but also those transmitted / received without the N26 interface can be stored.
 [2.1. UEの装置構成]
 まず、UE(User Equipment)の装置構成例について、図3を用いて説明する。UEは、制御部_A300、アンテナ310、送受信部_A320、記憶部_A340で構成されている。制御部_A300、送受信部_A320、記憶部_A340は、バスを介して接続されている。送受信部_A320は、アンテナ310と接続している。
[2.1. UE device configuration]
First, an example of a UE (User Equipment) device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The UE is composed of a control unit_A300, an antenna 310, a transmission / reception unit_A320, and a storage unit_A340. The control unit_A300, the transmission / reception unit_A320, and the storage unit_A340 are connected via a bus. The transmitter / receiver_A320 is connected to the antenna 310.
 制御部_A300は、UE全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_A300は、必要に応じて、記憶部_A340に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、UEにおける各種の処理を実現する。 Control unit_A300 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UE. The control unit_A300 realizes various processes in the UE by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_A340 as needed.
 送受信部_A320は、アンテナを介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置(eNB又はgNB)と無線通信する為の機能部である。すなわち、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いて、アクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置、及び/又はPDN、及び/又はDNとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The transmission / reception unit_A320 is a functional unit for wireless communication with a base station device (eNB or gNB) in the access network via an antenna. That is, the UE can send and receive user data and / or control information between the access network device and / or the core network device and / or PDN and / or DN using the transmitter / receiver_A320. can.
 図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いることにより、LTE-Uuインターフェースを介して、E-UTRAN内の基地局装置(eNB)と通信することができる。また、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いることにより、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)と通信することができる。また、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いることにより、N1インターフェースを介してAMFとNAS(Non-Access-Stratum)メッセージの送受信をすることができる。ただし、N1インターフェースは論理的なものであるため、実際には、UEとAMFの間の通信は、5G ANを介して行われる。 Explaining in detail with reference to FIG. 2, the UE can communicate with the base station device (eNB) in the E-UTRAN via the LTE-Uu interface by using the transmission / reception unit_A320. In addition, the UE can communicate with the base station device (gNB) in the 5GAN by using the transmission / reception unit_A320. In addition, the UE can send and receive NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) messages to and from AMF via the N1 interface by using the transmitter / receiver _A320. However, since the N1 interface is logical, communication between the UE and AMF is actually done via 5GAN.
 記憶部_A340は、UEの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。 The storage unit_A340 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of the UE.
 [2.2. gNBの装置構成]
 次に、gNBの装置構成例について、図4を用いて説明する。gNB は、制御部_B500、アンテナ510、ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530、記憶部_B540で構成されている。制御部_B500、ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530、記憶部_B540は、バスを介して接続されている。送受信部_B530は、アンテナ510と接続している。
[2.2. GNB device configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of gNB will be described with reference to FIG. The gNB is composed of a control unit_B500, an antenna 510, a network connection unit_B520, a transmission / reception unit_B530, and a storage unit_B540. The control unit_B500, network connection unit_B520, transmission / reception unit_B530, and storage unit_B540 are connected via a bus. The transmitter / receiver_B530 is connected to the antenna 510.
 制御部_B500は、gNB全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B500は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B540に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、gNBにおける各種の処理を実現する。 Control unit_B500 is a functional unit that controls the operation and function of the entire gNB. The control unit_B500 realizes various processes in the gNB by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B540 as needed.
 ネットワーク接続部_B520は、gNBが、AMF及び/又はUPFと通信する為の機能部である。すなわち、gNBは、ネットワーク接続部_B520を用いて、AMF及び/又はUPFとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The network connection part_B520 is a functional part for gNB to communicate with AMF and / or UPF. That is, the gNB can send and receive user data and / or control information between the AMF and / or the UPF by using the network connection unit_B520.
 送受信部_B530は、アンテナ510を介して、UEと無線通信する為の機能部である。すなわち、gNBは、送受信部_B530を用いて、UEとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The transmitter / receiver_B530 is a functional unit for wireless communication with the UE via the antenna 510. That is, the gNB can transmit / receive user data and / or control information to / from the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
 図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5G AN内にあるgNBは、ネットワーク接続部_B520を用いることにより、N2インターフェースを介して、AMFと通信することができ、N3インターフェースを介して、UPFと通信することができる。また、gNBは、送受信部_B530を用いることにより、UEと通信することができる。 Explaining in detail with reference to FIG. 2, the gNB in the 5GAN can communicate with the AMF via the N2 interface by using the network connection _B520, and the UPF via the N3 interface. Can communicate with. In addition, gNB can communicate with the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
 記憶部_B540は、gNBの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。 The storage unit_B540 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of gNB.
 [2.3. AMFの装置構成]
 次に、AMFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。AMFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。AMFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。
[2.3. AMF equipment configuration]
Next, an example of the AMF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The AMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The AMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
 制御部_B700は、AMF全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B700は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B740に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、AMFにおける各種の処理を実現する。 Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire AMF. The control unit_B700 realizes various processes in AMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
 ネットワーク接続部_B720は、AMFが、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDM、及び/又はSCEFと接続する為の機能部である。すなわち、AMFは、ネットワーク接続部_B720を用いて、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDM、及び/又はSCEFとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The network connection part_B720 is a functional part for AMF to connect to the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM, and / or SCEF. That is, the AMF uses the network connection_B720 to communicate with the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM, and / or SCEF. Data and / or control information can be sent and received.
 図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5GCN内にあるAMFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N2インターフェースを介して、gNBと通信することができ、N8インターフェースを介して、UDMと通信することができ、N11インターフェースを介して、SMFと通信することができ、N15インターフェースを介して、PCFと通信することができる。また、AMFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N1インターフェースを介して、UEとNASメッセージの送受信をすることができる。ただし、N1インターフェースは論理的なものであるため、実際には、UEとAMFの間の通信は、5G ANを介して行われる。また、AMFは、N26インターフェースをサポートする場合、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N26インターフェースを介して、MMEと通信することができる。 Explained in detail with reference to FIG. 2, the AMF within the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N2 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UDM via the N8 interface. It can communicate, can communicate with the SMF via the N11 interface, and can communicate with the PCF via the N15 interface. In addition, AMF can send and receive NAS messages to and from the UE via the N1 interface by using the network connection unit_A620. However, since the N1 interface is logical, communication between the UE and AMF is actually done via 5GAN. If the AMF supports the N26 interface, it can communicate with the MME via the N26 interface by using the network connection _A620.
 記憶部_B740は、AMFの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。 The storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of AMF.
 尚、AMFは、N2インターフェースを用いたRANとの制御メッセージを交換する機能、N1インターフェースを用いたUEとのNASメッセージを交換する機能、NASメッセージの暗号化及び完全性保護を行う機能、登録管理(Registration management; RM)機能、接続管理(Connection management; CM)機能、到達可能性管理(Reachability management)機能、UE等の移動性管理(Mobility management)機能、UEとSMF間のSM(Session Management)メッセージを転送する機能、アクセス認証(Access Authentication、Access Authorization)機能、セキュリティアンカー機能(SEA; Security Anchor Functionality)、セキュリティコンテキスト管理(SCM; Security Context Management)機能、N3IWF(Non-3GPP Interworking Function)に対するN2インターフェースをサポートする機能、N3IWFを介したUEとのNAS信号の送受信をサポートする機能、N3IWFを介して接続するUEの認証する機能等を有する。 AMF has a function to exchange control messages with RAN using N2 interface, a function to exchange NAS messages with UE using N1 interface, a function to encrypt and protect the integrity of NAS messages, and registration management. (Registration management; RM) function, connection management (CM) function, reachability management (Reachability management) function, mobility management (Mobility management) function such as UE, SM (Session Management) between UE and SMF Message forwarding function, access authentication (Access Authorization) function, security anchor function (SEA; Security Anchor Functionality), security context management (SCM; Security Context Management) function, N2 for N3IWF (Non-3GPP Interworking Function) It has a function to support an interface, a function to support transmission / reception of NAS signals with a UE via N3IWF, a function to authenticate a UE connected via N3IWF, and the like.
 また、登録管理では、UEごとのRM状態が管理される。RM状態は、UEとAMFとの間で同期がとられていてもよい。RM状態としては、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)と、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)がある。RM-DEREGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されていないため、AMFにおけるUEコンテキストが、そのUEに対する有効な位置情報やルーティング情報を持っていない為、AMFはUEに到達できない状態である。また、RM-REGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されているため、UEはネットワークとの登録が必要なサービスを受信することができる。尚、RM状態は、5GMM状態(5GMM state)と表現されてもよい。この場合、RM-DEREGISTERED状態は、5GMM-DEREGISTERED状態と表現されてもよいし、RM-REGISTERED状態は、5GMM-REGISTERED状態と表現されてもよい。 Also, in registration management, the RM status for each UE is managed. The RM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF. The RM state includes a non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registered state (RM-REGISTERED state). In the RM-DEREGISTERED state, the UE is not registered in the network, and the UE context in the AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for the UE, so the AMF cannot reach the UE. Also, in the RM-REGISTERED state, the UE is registered in the network, so the UE can receive services that require registration with the network. The RM state may be expressed as a 5GMM state. In this case, the RM-DEREGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-DEREGISTERED state, and the RM-REGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-REGISTERED state.
 言い換えると、5GMM-REGISTEREDは、各装置が、5GMMコンテキストを確立した状態であってもよいし、PDUセッションコンテキストを確立した状態であってもよい。尚、各装置が5GMM-REGISTEREDである場合、UE_A10は、ユーザデータや制御メッセージの送受信を開始してもよいし、ページングに対して応答してもよい。さらに、尚、各装置が5GMM-REGISTEREDである場合、UE_A10は、初期登録のための登録手続き以外の登録手続き、及び/又はサービス要求手続きを実行してもよい。 In other words, 5GMM-REGISTERED may be in a state in which each device has established a 5GMM context or a PDU session context. When each device is 5GMM-REGISTERED, UE_A10 may start sending and receiving user data and control messages, or may respond to paging. Further, when each device is 5GMM-REGISTERED, UE_A10 may execute a registration procedure other than the registration procedure for initial registration and / or a service request procedure.
 さらに、5GMM-DEREGISTEREDは、各装置が、5GMMコンテキストを確立していない状態であってもよいし、UE_A10の位置情報がネットワークに把握されていない状態であってもよいし、ネットワークがUE_A10に到達不能である状態であってもよい。尚、各装置が5GMM-DEREGISTEREDである場合、UE_A10は、登録手続きを開始してもよいし、登録手続きを実行することで5GMMコンテキストを確立してもよい。 Furthermore, in 5GMM-DEREGISTERED, each device may be in a state where the 5GMM context has not been established, the position information of UE_A10 may not be known to the network, or the network reaches UE_A10. It may be in an impossible state. If each device is 5GMM-DEREGISTERED, UE_A10 may start the registration procedure or establish the 5GMM context by executing the registration procedure.
 また、接続管理では、UEごとのCM状態が管理される。CM状態は、UEとAMFとの間で同期がとられていてもよい。CM状態としては、非接続状態(CM-IDLE state)と、接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state)がある。CM-IDLE状態では、UEはRM-REGISTERED状態にあるが、N1インターフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っていない。また、CM-IDLE状態では、UEはN2インターフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及びN3インターフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていない。一方、CM-CONNECTED状態では、N1インターフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っている。また、CM-CONNECTED状態では、UEはN2インターフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及び/又はN3インターフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていてもよい。 Also, in connection management, the CM status for each UE is managed. The CM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF. The CM state includes a non-connected state (CM-IDLE state) and a connected state (CM-CONNECTED state). In the CM-IDLE state, the UE is in the RM-REGISTERED state, but does not have a NAS signaling connection established with the AMF via the N1 interface. Also, in the CM-IDLE state, the UE does not have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and an N3 interface connection (N3 connection). On the other hand, in the CM-CONNECTED state, it has a NAS signaling connection established with AMF via the N1 interface. Further, in the CM-CONNECTED state, the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and / or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
 さらに、接続管理では、3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態と、non-3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態とで分けて管理されてもよい。この場合、3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態としては、3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態(CM-IDLE state over 3GPP access)と、3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state over 3GPP access)とがあってよい。さらに、non-3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態としては、non-3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態(CM-IDLE state over non-3GPP access)と、non-3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state over non-3GPP access)とがあってよい。尚、非接続状態はアイドルモード表現されてもよく、接続状態モードはコネクテッドモードと表現されてもよい。 Furthermore, in connection management, the CM state in 3GPP access and the CM state in non-3GPP access may be managed separately. In this case, the CM state in 3GPP access may be a non-connected state in 3GPP access (CM-IDLE state over 3GPP access) and a connected state in 3GPP access (CM-CONNECTED state over 3GPP access). Furthermore, the CM state in non-3GPP access includes the non-connected state (CM-IDLE state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access and the connection state (CM-CONNECTED state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access. ) May be there. The disconnected state may be expressed as an idle mode, and the connected state mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
 尚、CM状態は、5GMMモード(5GMM mode)と表現されてもよい。この場合、非接続状態は、5GMM非接続モード(5GMM-IDLE mode)と表現されてもよいし、接続状態は、5GMM接続モード(5GMM-CONNECTED mode)と表現されてもよい。さらに、3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態は、3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM非接続モード(5GMM-IDLE mode over 3GPP access)と表現されてもよいし、3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態は、3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM接続モード(5GMM-CONNECTED mode over 3GPP access)と表現されてもよい。さらに、non-3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態は、non-3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM非接続モード(5GMM-IDLE mode over non-3GPP access)と表現されてもよいし、non-3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態は、non-3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM接続モード(5GMM-CONNECTED mode over non-3GPP access)と表現されてもよい。尚、5GMM非接続モードはアイドルモード表現されてもよく、5GMM接続モードはコネクテッドモードと表現されてもよい。 The CM state may be expressed as 5GMM mode (5GMM mode). In this case, the non-connected state may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode), and the connected state may be expressed as 5GMM connected mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode). Furthermore, the disconnected state in 3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connection mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over 3GPP access) in 3GPP access, and the connection state in 3GPP access is 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-) in 3GPP access. It may be expressed as CONNECTED mode over 3GPP access). Further, the non-connection state in non-3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connection mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access, and the connection state in non-3GPP access is non. It may be expressed as 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode over non-3GPP access) in -3GPP access. The 5GMM non-connection mode may be expressed as an idle mode, and the 5GMM connection mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
 また、AMFは、コアネットワーク_B内に1以上配置されてもよい。また、AMFは、1以上のNSI(Network Slice Instance)を管理するNFでもよい。また、AMFは、複数のNSI間で共有される共有CPファンクション(CCNF; Common CPNF(Control Plane Network Function))でもよい。 Also, one or more AMFs may be placed in the core network_B. In addition, AMF may be an NF that manages one or more NSIs (Network Slice Instances). Further, the AMF may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)) shared among a plurality of NSIs.
 尚、N3IWFは、UEが5GSに対してnon-3GPPアクセスを介して接続する場合に、non-3GPPアクセスと5GCNとの間に配置される装置及び/又は機能である。 Note that N3IWF is a device and / or function that is placed between non-3GPP access and 5GCN when the UE connects to 5GS via non-3GPP access.
 [2.4. SMFの装置構成]
 次に、SMFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。SMFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。SMFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。
[2.4. SMF device configuration]
Next, an example of the SMF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The SMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The SMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
 制御部_B700は、SMF全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B700は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B740に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、SMFにおける各種の処理を実現する。 Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire SMF. The control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the SMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
 ネットワーク接続部_B720は、SMFが、AMF、及び/又はUPF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDMと接続する為の機能部である。すなわち、SMFは、ネットワーク接続部_B720を用いて、AMF、及び/又はUPF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDMとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The network connection part_B720 is a functional part for SMF to connect with AMF and / or UPF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM. That is, the SMF can send and receive user data and / or control information between the AMF and / or the UPF and / or the PCF and / or the UDM by using the network connection part_B720.
 図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5GCN内にあるSMFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N11インターフェースを介して、AMFと通信することができ、N4インターフェースを介して、UPFと通信することができ、N7インターフェースを介して、PCFと通信することができ、N10インターフェースを介して、UDMと通信することができる。 Explained in detail with reference to FIG. 2, the SMF in the 5GCN can communicate with the AMF via the N11 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UPF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the PCF via the N7 interface, and it can communicate with the UDM via the N10 interface.
 記憶部_B740は、SMFの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。 Storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of SMF.
 SMFは、PDUセッションの確立・修正・解放等のセッション管理(Session Management)機能、UEに対するIPアドレス割り当て(IP address allocation)及びその管理機能、UPFの選択と制御機能、適切な目的地(送信先)へトラフィックをルーティングする為のUPFの設定機能、NASメッセージのSM部分を送受信する機能、下りリンクのデータが到着したことを通知(Downlink Data Notification)する機能、AMF経由でN2インターフェースを介してANに送信されるAN特有の(ANごとの)SM情報を提供する機能、セッションに対するSSCモード(Session and Service Continuity mode)を決定する機能、ローミング機能等を有する。 SMF has session management functions such as establishment, modification, and release of PDU sessions, IP address allocation and management functions for UEs, UPF selection and control functions, and appropriate destinations (destination). ), UPF setting function for routing traffic to), function to send and receive SM part of NAS message, function to notify that downlink data has arrived (Downlink Data Notification), AN via N2 interface via AMF It has a function to provide SM information peculiar to AN (for each AN) transmitted to, a function to determine the SSC mode (Session and Service Continuity mode) for the session, a roaming function, and the like.
 [2.5. UPFの装置構成]
 次に、UPFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。UPFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。UPFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。
[2.5. UPF device configuration]
Next, an example of the UPF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The UPF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The UPF may be a node that handles the control plane.
 制御部_B700は、UPF全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B700は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B740に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、UPFにおける各種の処理を実現する。 Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UPF. The control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the UPF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
 ネットワーク接続部_B720は、UPFが、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はDNと接続する為の機能部である。すなわち、UPFは、ネットワーク接続部_B720を用いて、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はDNとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。 The network connection unit_B720 is a functional unit for the UPF to connect to the base station equipment (gNB) and / or SMF and / or DN in 5GAN. That is, the UPF uses the network connection _B720 to send and receive user data and / or control information between the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF and / or DN. Can be done.
 図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5GCN内にあるUPFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N3インターフェースを介して、gNBと通信することができ、N4インターフェースを介して、SMFと通信することができ、N6インターフェースを介して、DNと通信することができ、N9インターフェースを介して、他のUPFと通信することができる。 To explain in detail with reference to FIG. 2, the UPF in the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N3 interface by using the network connection _A620, and with the SMF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the DN via the N6 interface, and it can communicate with other UPFs via the N9 interface.
 記憶部_B740は、UPFの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。 The storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of UPF.
 UPFは、intra-RAT mobility又はinter-RAT mobilityに対するアンカーポイントとしての機能、DNに相互接続するための外部PDUセッションポイントとしての機能(つまり、DNとコアネットワーク_Bとの間のゲートウェイとして、ユーザデータを転送する機能)、パケットのルーティング及び転送する機能、1つのDNに対して複数のトラフィックフローのルーティングをサポートするUL CL(Uplink Classifier)機能、マルチホーム(multi-homed)PDUセッションをサポートするBranching point機能、user planeに対するQoS (Quality of Service) 処理機能、上りリンクトラフィックの検証機能、下りリンクパケットのバッファリング、下りリンクデータ通知(Downlink Data Notification)をトリガする機能等を有する。 The UPF acts as an anchor point for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, as an external PDU session point for interconnecting the DN (ie, as a gateway between the DN and the core network_B). Data transfer function), packet routing and transfer function, UL CL (Uplink Classifier) function that supports routing of multiple traffic flows to one DN, and multi-homed PDU session support. It has a branching point function, a QoS (Quality of Service) processing function for userplane, a function for verifying uplink traffic, a function for buffering downlink packets, and a function for triggering downlink data notification (Downlink Data Notification).
 また、UPFは、IP通信及び/又はnon-IP通信の為のゲートウェイでもよい。また、UPFは、IP通信を転送する機能を持ってもよく、non-IP通信とIP通信を変換する機能を持っていてもよい。さらに複数配置されるゲートウェイは、コアネットワーク_Bと単一のDNを接続するゲートウェイでもよい。尚、UPFは、他のNFとの接続性を備えてもよく、他のNFを介して各装置に接続してもよい。 The UPF may also be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication. In addition, the UPF may have a function of transferring IP communication, or may have a function of converting between non-IP communication and IP communication. Further, the plurality of gateways to be arranged may be a gateway connecting the core network_B and a single DN. The UPF may have connectivity with other NFs, or may be connected to each device via the other NFs.
 尚、ユーザプレーン(user plane)は、UEとネットワークとの間で送受信されるユーザデータ(user data)のことである。ユーザプレーンは、PDNコネクション、又はPDUセッションを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、EPSの場合、ユーザプレーンは、LTE-Uuインターフェース、及び/又はS1-Uインターフェース、及び/又はS5インターフェース、及び/又はS8インターフェース、及び/又はSGiインターフェースを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、5GSの場合、ユーザプレーンは、UEとNG RANとの間のインターフェース、及び/又はN3インターフェース、及び/又はN9インターフェース、及び/又はN6インターフェースを介して送受信されてもよい。以下、ユーザプレーンは、U-Planeと表現されてもよい。 The user plane is user data transmitted and received between the UE and the network. The user plane may be transmitted and received using a PDN connection or a PDU session. Further, in the case of EPS, the user plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and / or the S1-U interface and / or the S5 interface and / or the S8 interface and / or the SGi interface. Further, in the case of 5GS, the user plane may be transmitted and received via the interface between the UE and NG RAN and / or the N3 interface and / or the N9 interface and / or the N6 interface. Hereinafter, the user plane may be expressed as a U-Plane.
 さらに、制御プレーン(control plane)は、UEの通信制御等を行うために送受信される制御メッセージのことである。制御プレーンは、UEとMMEとの間のNAS (Non-Access-Stratum)シグナリングコネクションを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、EPSの場合、制御プレーンは、LTE-Uuインターフェース、及びS1-MMEインターフェースを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、5GSの場合、制御プレーンは、UEとNG RANとの間のインターフェース、及びN2インターフェースを用いて送受信されてもよい。以下、制御プレーンは、コントロールプレーンと表現されてもよいし、C-Planeと表現されてもよい。 Furthermore, the control plane is a control message sent and received to control the communication of the UE. The control plane may be transmitted and received using a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) signaling connection between the UE and MME. Further, in the case of EPS, the control plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and the S1-MME interface. Further, in the case of 5GS, the control plane may be transmitted and received using the interface between the UE and NG RAN and the N2 interface. Hereinafter, the control plane may be expressed as a control plane or a C-Plane.
 さらに、U-Plane(User Plane; UP)は、ユーザデータを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。さらに、C-Plane(Control Plane; CP)は、制御メッセージを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, the U-Plane (User Plane; UP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers. Further, the C-Plane (Control Plane; CP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving control messages, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
 [2.6. その他の装置及び/又は機能及び/又は本実施形態における識別情報の説明]
 次に、その他の装置及び/又は機能及び/又は識別情報について説明を行う。
[2.6. Description of other devices and / or functions and / or identification information in this embodiment]
Next, other devices and / or functions and / or identification information will be described.
 ネットワークとは、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNのうち、少なくとも一部を指す。また、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNのうち、少なくとも一部に含まれる1以上の装置を、ネットワーク又はネットワーク装置と称してもよい。つまり、ネットワークがメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行するということは、ネットワーク内の装置(ネットワーク装置、及び/又は制御装置)がメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行することを意味してもよい。逆に、ネットワーク内の装置がメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行するということは、ネットワークがメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行することを意味してもよい。 The network refers to at least a part of the access network_B, core network_B, and DN. Further, one or more devices included in at least a part of the access network_B, the core network_B, and the DN may be referred to as a network or a network device. That is, the fact that the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing may mean that a device (network device and / or control device) in the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing. .. Conversely, the fact that a device in the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing may mean that the network executes message transmission / reception and / or processing.
 また、SM(セッションマネジメント)メッセージ(NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SMメッセージとも称する)は、SMのための手続きで用いられるNASメッセージであってよく、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10とSMF_A230の間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。さらに、SMメッセージには、PDUセッション確立要求(PDU session establishment request)メッセージ、PDUセッション確立受諾(PDU session establishment accept)メッセージ、PDUセッション拒絶(PDU session establishment reject)メッセージ、PDUセッション変更要求(PDU session modification request)メッセージ、PDUセッション変更コマンド(PDU session modification command)メッセージ、PDUセッション変更完了メッセージ(PDU session modification complete)、PDUセッション変更コマンド拒絶(PDU session modification command reject)メッセージ、PDUセッション変更拒絶(PDU session modification reject)メッセージ、PDUセッション解放要求(PDU session release request)メッセージ、PDUセッション解放拒絶(PDU session release reject)メッセージ、PDUセッション解放コマンド(PDU session release command)メッセージ、PDUセッション解放完了(PDU session release complete)メッセージ等が含まれてもよい。また、SMのための手続きまたはSM手続きには、PDUセッション確立手続き(PDU session establishment procedure)、PDUセッション変更手続き(PDU session modification procedure)、PDUセッション解放手続き(UE-requested PDU session release procedure)が含まれてもよい。なお、各手続きは、UEから開始される手続きであってもよいし、NWから開始される手続きであってもよい。 In addition, SM (session management) messages (also referred to as NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SM messages) may be NAS messages used in procedures for SM, and are sent and received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240. It may be a control message to be executed. In addition, SM messages include a PDU session establishment request message, a PDU session establishment accept message, a PDU session establishment reject message, and a PDU session modification request (PDU session modification). request message, PDU session modification command message, PDU session modification complete message, PDU session modification command reject message, PDU session modification rejection (PDU session modification) reject message, PDU session release request message, PDU session release reject message, PDU session release command message, PDU session release complete A message or the like may be included. In addition, the procedure for SM or SM procedure includes PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), PDU session modification procedure (PDU session modification procedure), and PDU session release procedure (UE-requested PDU session release procedure). It may be. Each procedure may be a procedure started from the UE or a procedure started from the NW.
 また、MM(Mobility management)メッセージ(またはNAS MMメッセージとも称する)は、MMのための手続きに用いられるNASメッセージであってよく、UE_A10とAMF_A240の間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。さらに、MMメッセージには、登録要求(Registration request)メッセージ、登録受諾(Registration accept)メッセージ、登録拒絶(Registration reject)メッセージ、登録解除要求(De-registration request)メッセージ、登録解除受諾(De-registration accept)メッセージ、configuration updateコマンド(configuration update command)メッセージ、設定更新受諾(configuration update complete)メッセージ、サービス要求(Service request)メッセージ、サービス受諾(Service accept)メッセージ、サービス拒絶(Service reject)メッセージ、通知(Notification)メッセージ、通知応答(Notification response)メッセージ等が含まれてよい。また、MMのための手続きまたはMM手続きは、登録手続き(Registration procedure)、登録解除手続き(De-registration procedure)、ジェネリックUE設定更新(Generic UE configuration update)手続き、認証・承認手続き、サービス要求手続き(Service request procedure)、ページング手続き(Paging procedure)、通知手続き(Notification procedure)が含まれてよい。 Further, the MM (Mobility management) message (also referred to as NAS MM message) may be a NAS message used for the procedure for MM, and may be a control message sent and received between UE_A10 and AMF_A240. In addition, the MM message includes a registration request message, a registration accept message, a registration reject message, a de-registration request message, and a de-registration accept message. ) Message, configuration update command message, configuration update complete message, service request message, service accept message, service reject message, notification ) Messages, Notification response messages, etc. may be included. In addition, the procedure for MM or MM procedure is registration procedure (Registration procedure), deregistration procedure (De-registration procedure), generic UE configuration update procedure, authentication / approval procedure, service request procedure ( Service request procedure), paging procedure (Paging procedure), notification procedure (Notification procedure) may be included.
 また、5GS(5G System)サービスは、コアネットワーク_B190を用いて提供される接続サービスでよい。さらに、5GSサービスは、EPSサービスと異なるサービスでもよいし、EPSサービスと同様のサービスでもよい。 Also, the 5GS (5G System) service may be a connection service provided using the core network_B190. Further, the 5GS service may be a service different from the EPS service or a service similar to the EPS service.
 また、non 5GSサービスは、5GSサービス以外のサービスでよく、EPSサービス、及び/又はnon EPSサービスが含まれてもよい。 Further, the non 5GS service may be a service other than the 5GS service, and may include an EPS service and / or a non EPS service.
 また、PDN(Packet Data Network)タイプとは、PDNコネクションのタイプを示すものであり、IPv4、IPv6、IPv4v6、non-IPがある。IPv4が指定された場合、IPv4を用いてデータの送受信を行う事を示す。IPv6が指定された場合は、IPv6を用いてデータの送受信を行う事を示す。IPv4v6が指定された場合は、IPv4又はIPv6を用いてデータの送受信を行う事を示す。non-IPが指定された場合は、IPを用いた通信ではなく、IP以外の通信方法によって通信する事を示す。 The PDN (Packet Data Network) type indicates the type of PDN connection, and includes IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6, and non-IP. When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4. When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6. When IPv4v6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4 or IPv6. When non-IP is specified, it indicates that communication is performed by a communication method other than IP, not communication using IP.
 また、PDU(Protocol Data Unit/Packet Data Unit)セッションとは、PDU接続性サービスを提供するDNとUEとの間の関連性として定義することができるが、UEと外部ゲートウェイとの間で確立される接続性であってもよい。UEは、5GSにおいて、アクセスネットワーク_B及びコアネットワーク_Bを介したPDUセッションを確立することにより、PDUセッションを用いて、DNとの間のユーザデータの送受信を行うことができる。ここで、この外部ゲートウェイとは、UPF、SCEF等であってよい。UEは、PDUセッションを用いて、DNに配置されるアプリケーションサーバー等の装置と、ユーザデータの送受信を実行する事ができる。 In addition, a PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session can be defined as the relationship between the DN that provides the PDU connectivity service and the UE, but it is established between the UE and the external gateway. It may be connectivity. By establishing a PDU session via the access network_B and the core network_B in 5GS, the UE can send and receive user data to and from the DN using the PDU session. Here, the external gateway may be UPF, SCEF, or the like. The UE can use the PDU session to send and receive user data to and from devices such as application servers located in the DN.
 尚、各装置(UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置)は、PDUセッションに対して、1以上の識別情報を対応づけて管理してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報には、DNN、QoSルール、PDUセッションタイプ、アプリケーション識別情報、NSI識別情報、アクセスネットワーク識別情報、及びSSC modeのうち1以上が含まれてもよいし、その他の情報がさらに含まれてもよい。さらに、PDUセッションを複数確立する場合には、PDUセッションに対応づけられる各識別情報は、同じ内容でもよいし、異なる内容でもよい。 Note that each device (UE and / or access network device and / or core network device) may manage one or more identification information in association with each other for the PDU session. Note that these identification information may include one or more of DNN, QoS rule, PDU session type, application identification information, NSI identification information, access network identification information, and SSC mode, and other information. It may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, the identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different contents.
 また、DNN(Data Network Name)は、コアネットワーク及び/又はDN等の外部ネットワークを識別する識別情報でよい。さらに、DNNは、コアネットワーク_B190を接続するPGW_A30/UPF_A235等のゲートウェイを選択する情報として用いることもできる。さらに、DNNは、APN(Access Point Name)に相当するものでもよい。 Further, DNN (Data Network Name) may be identification information that identifies the core network and / or the external network such as DN. Furthermore, DNN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPF_A235 that connects the core network_B190. Further, the DNN may correspond to an APN (Access Point Name).
 また、PDU(Protocol Data Unit/Packet Data Unit)セッションタイプは、PDUセッションのタイプを示すものであり、IPv4、IPv6、Ethernet、Unstructuredがある。IPv4が指定された場合、IPv4を用いてデータの送受信を行うことを示す。IPv6が指定された場合は、IPv6を用いてデータの送受信を行うことを示す。Ethernetが指定された場合は、Ethernetフレームの送受信を行うことを示す。また、Ethernetは、IPを用いた通信を行わないことを示してもよい。Unstructuredが指定された場合は、Point-to-Point(P2P)トンネリング技術を用いて、DNにあるアプリケーションサーバー等にデータを送受信することを示す。P2Pトンネリング技術としては、例えば、UDP/IPのカプセル化技術を用いてもよい。尚、PDUセッションタイプには、上記の他にIPが含まれてもよい。IPは、UEがIPv4とIPv6の両方を使用可能である場合に指定する事ができる。 The PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session type indicates the type of PDU session, and includes IPv4, IPv6, Ethernet, and Unstructured. When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4. When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6. When Ethernet is specified, it indicates that Ethernet frames are sent and received. Further, Ethernet may indicate that communication using IP is not performed. When Unstructured is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received to the application server etc. in the DN by using the point-to-point (P2P) tunneling technology. As the P2P tunneling technique, for example, a UDP / IP encapsulation technique may be used. The PDU session type may include an IP in addition to the above. IP can be specified if the UE can use both IPv4 and IPv6.
 また、PLMN(Public land mobile network)は、移動無線通信サービスを提供する通信ネットワークである。PLMNは、(移動体)通信事業者であるオペレータが管理するネットワークであり、PLMN IDにより、オペレータを識別することができる。本稿でPLMNはPLMN IDを意味してもよい。UEのIMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)のMCC(Mobile Country Code)とMNC(Mobile Network Code)と一致するPLMNはHome PLMN(HPLMN)であってよい。訪問先PLMN(Visited PLMN; VPLMN)は、HPLMN又はHEPLMN(Home Equivalent PLMN)と異なるPLMNであってよい。PLMNはコアネットワークを意味してもよい。 PLMN (Public land mobile network) is a communication network that provides mobile wireless communication services. PLMN is a network managed by an operator who is a (mobile) telecommunications carrier, and the operator can be identified by the PLMN ID. In this paper, PLMN may mean PLMN ID. The PLMN that matches the MCC (Mobile Country Code) and MNC (Mobile Network Code) of the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) of the UE may be Home PLMN (HPLMN). The visited PLMN (Visited PLMN; VPLMN) may be a PLMN different from the HPLMN or HEPLMN (Home Equivalent PLMN). PLMN may mean core network.
 さらに、UEは、USIMに1又は複数のEHPLMN(Equivalent HPLMN、等価HPLMN)を識別するための、Equivalent HPLMN listを保持していてもよい。HPLMN、及び/又はEHPLMNと異なるPLMNはVPLMN(Visited PLMN又はvPLMN)であってよい。 Furthermore, the UE may have an Equivalent HPLMN list for identifying one or more EHPLMNs (Equivalent HPLMN, equivalent HPLMN) in the USIM. The PLMN different from HPLMN and / or EHPLMN may be VPLMN (Visited PLMN or vPLMN).
 UEが登録を成功したPLMNはRPLMN(Registered PLMN、登録PLMN)であってよい。各装置は、UEのPLMN選択においてRPLMNと等価に使用できる、1又は複数のEPLMN(Equivalent PLMN、等価PLMN)を識別するためのEquivalent PLMN listをRPLMNから受信、及び/又は保持、及び/又は記憶してもよい。 The PLMN that the UE has successfully registered may be an RPLMN (Registered PLMN, registered PLMN). Each device receives, / or retains, and / or stores an Equivalent PLMN list from the RPLMN to identify one or more EPLMNs (Equivalent PLMN, equivalent PLMN) that can be used equivalently to the RPLMN in the PLMN selection of the UE. You may.
 現在のPLMN(current PLMN)とは、UEが要求するPLMN、及び/又はUEが選択したPLMN、及び/又はRPLMN、及び/又はネットワークが許可したPLMN、及び/又はメッセージを送受信するコアネットワーク装置が属するPLMNであってもよい。 The current PLMN (current PLMN) is a PLMN requested by the UE and / or a PLMN selected by the UE, and / or an RPLMN, and / or a PLMN permitted by the network, and / or a core network device that sends and receives messages. It may be the PLMN to which it belongs.
 要求するPLMNとは、UEがメッセージを送信する際の、メッセージの送信先ネットワークを意味する。具体的には、UEがメッセージを送信する際に、UEにより選択されたPLMNであってよい。要求するPLMNは、UEが要求するPLMNであり、現在のPLMNであってもよい。また、UEが登録状態においては、要求するPLMNは登録PLMNであってもよい。 The requested PLMN means the network to which the message is sent when the UE sends the message. Specifically, it may be the PLMN selected by the UE when the UE sends a message. The required PLMN is the PLMN requested by the UE and may be the current PLMN. Further, when the UE is in the registered state, the requested PLMN may be the registered PLMN.
 また、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素(SOR (Steering of Roaming) transparent container IE)は、HPLMN及び/又はVPLMNが、ローミングするUEに最適なローミング先ネットワークを示す為の情報が含まれていてよい。具体的には、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素は、 list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinationsを含んでいてよい。 Further, the SOR transparent container information element (SOR (Steering of Roaming) transparent container IE) may include information for HPLMN and / or VPLMN to indicate the optimum roaming destination network for the roaming UE. Specifically, the SOR transparent container information element may include list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations.
 また、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素及び/又はlist of preferred PLMN/access technology combinationsは、PLMN(HPLMN)が、セキュリティ機能により暗号化した"Secured packet"に含まれていてもよく、"Secured packet"と称されることがあってもよい。 In addition, the SOR transparent container information element and / or list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations may be included in the "Secured packet" encrypted by the security function of PLMN (HPLMN), and is called "Secured packet". It may be done.
 尚、コアネットワーク内のエンティティの一つである、SORアプリケーションファンクション(Steering of Roaming application function;SOR-AF)が、UDMにlist of preferred PLMN/access technology combinationsを含む情報を提供してもよいし、AMFは、UDMに提供されたlist of preferred PLMN/access technology combinationsを含む情報を参照し、この情報に基づいてSOR透過コンテナ情報要素を生成し、UE送信してもよい。 The SOR application function (SOR-AF), which is one of the entities in the core network, may provide UDM with information including list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations. The AMF may refer to the information including the list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations provided to the UDM, generate the SOR transparent container information element based on this information, and send it to the UE.
 ここで、list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinationsは、PLMN(preferred PLMN)とアクセス技術(access technology)の組み合わせで構成されるリストであってよく、各組み合わせは、優先順位が高い順に並んでいてよい。 Here, list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations may be a list composed of combinations of PLMN (preferred PLMN) and access technology (access technology), and each combination may be arranged in descending order of priority. ..
 また、例えば、UEがモビリティによるネットワークの切り替えや、ローミング先での電源投入時に実行される自動モード(Automatic mode)によるPLMN選択において、PLMNとアクセス技術の組み合わせで最も優先順位が高く、使用可能かつ許可可能な組み合わせが選択されてよい。 In addition, for example, in the network switching by mobility of the UE and the PLMN selection by the automatic mode (Automatic mode) executed when the power is turned on at the roaming destination, the combination of PLMN and access technology has the highest priority and can be used. Allowable combinations may be selected.
 また、ネットワークスライス(NS)とは、特定のネットワーク能力及びネットワーク特性を提供する論理的なネットワークである。UE及び/又はネットワークは、5GSにおいて、ネットワークスライス(NWスライス; NS)をサポートすることができる。ネットワークスライスのことを、単にスライスとも呼称する場合がある。 A network slice (NS) is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics. UEs and / or networks can support network slices (NW slices; NS) in 5GS. Network slices are sometimes referred to simply as slices.
 また、ネットワークスライスインスタンス(NSI)とは、ネットワーク機能(NF)のインスタンス(実体)と、必要なリソースのセットで構成され、配置されるネットワークスライスを形成する。ここで、NFとは、ネットワークにおける処理機能であって、3GPPで採用又は定義されたものである。NSIはコアネットワーク_B内に1以上構成される、NSの実体である。また、NSIはNST(Network Slice Template)を用いて生成された仮想的なNF(Network Function)により構成されてもよい。 A network slice instance (NSI) is composed of an instance (entity) of a network function (NF) and a set of necessary resources, and forms a network slice to be arranged. Here, NF is a processing function in the network and is adopted or defined in 3GPP. NSI is an entity of NS that consists of one or more in core network_B. Further, NSI may be composed of a virtual NF (Network Function) generated by using NST (Network Slice Template).
 ここで、NSTとは、要求される通信サービスや能力(capability)を提供する為のリソース要求に関連付けられ、1以上のNFの論理的表現である。つまり、NSIとは、複数のNFにより構成されたコアネットワーク_B190内の集合体でよい。また、NSIはサービス等によって配送されるユーザデータを分ける為に構成された論理的なネットワークでよい。NSには、1以上のNFが構成されてよい。NSに構成されるNFは、他のNSと共有される装置であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。 Here, NST is a logical expression of one or more NFs associated with a resource request for providing the required communication service and capability. In other words, the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B190 composed of a plurality of NFs. In addition, NSI may be a logical network configured to separate user data delivered by services and the like. One or more NFs may be configured in NS. The NF configured in NS may or may not be a device shared with other NS.
 UE、及び/又ネットワーク内の装置は、NSSAI、及び/又はS-NSSAI、及び/又はUE usage type、及び/又は1以上のNSI ID等の登録情報、及び/又はAPNに基づいて、1以上のNSに割り当てられることができる。尚、UE usage typeは、NSIを識別するための使用される、UEの登録情報に含まれるパラメータ値である。UE usage typeはHSSに記憶されていてよい。AMFはUE usage typeに基づきSMFとUPFを選択してもよい。 UE and / or devices in the network are 1 or more based on NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI and / or UE usage type and / or registration information such as 1 or more NSI IDs and / or APN. Can be assigned to NS. The UE usage type is a parameter value included in the UE registration information used to identify the NSI. The UE usage type may be stored in the HSS. AMF may select SMF and UPF based on UE usage type.
 また、S-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information)は、NSを識別するための情報である。S-NSSAIは、SST(Slice/Service type)のみで構成されてもよいし、SSTとSD(Slice Differentiator)の両方で構成されてもよい。ここで、SSTとは、機能とサービスの面で期待されるNSの動作を示す情報である。また、SDは、SSTで示される複数のNSIから1つのNSIを選択する際に、SSTを補間する情報であってもよい。S-NSSAIは、PLMNごとに特有な情報であってもよいし、PLMN間で共通化された標準の情報であってもよい。また、ネットワークは、デフォルトS-NSSAIとして、UEの登録情報に1以上のS-NSSAIを記憶してもよい。尚、S-NSSAIがデフォルトS-NSSAIである場合において、UEが登録要求メッセージにおいて有効なS-NSSAIをネットワークに送信しないときは、ネットワークは、UEに関係するNSを提供してもよい。 In addition, S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) is information for identifying NS. S-NSSAI may be composed of only SST (Slice / Service type), or may be composed of both SST and SD (Slice Differentiator). Here, SST is information indicating the operation of NS expected in terms of functions and services. Further, SD may be information for interpolating SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSIs represented by SST. The S-NSSAI may be information peculiar to each PLMN, or may be standard information shared among PLMNs. In addition, the network may store one or more S-NSSAI in the UE registration information as the default S-NSSAI. If the S-NSSAI is the default S-NSSAI and the UE does not send a valid S-NSSAI to the network in the registration request message, the network may provide the NS related to the UE.
 また、UEとNW間で送受信されるS-NSSAIは、S-NSSAI IE(Information element)と表現されてもよい。さらに、UEとNW間で送受信されるS-NSSAI IEは、登録PLMNのSST及び/又はSDで構成されるS-NSSAI、及び/又はそのS-NSSAIがマップされたHPLMNのS-NSSAIを示すSST及び/又はSDと、が構成されてもよい。UE及び/又はNWが記憶する一又は複数のS-NSSAIはSST及び/又はSDで構成されてもよいし、SST及び/又はSDで構成されるS-NSSAI、及び/又はそのS-NSSAIがマップされたHPLMNのS-NSSAIを示すSST及び/又はSDと、が構成されてもよい。 Further, the S-NSSAI transmitted and received between the UE and the NW may be expressed as S-NSSAI IE (Information element). Furthermore, the S-NSSAI IE transmitted and received between the UE and NW indicates the S-NSSAI composed of the SST and / or SD of the registered PLMN, and / or the S-NSSAI of the HPLMN to which the S-NSSAI is mapped. SST and / or SD may be configured. One or more S-NSSAIs stored by the UE and / or NW may be composed of SST and / or SD, and S-NSSAI composed of SST and / or SD, and / or S-NSSAI thereof. An SST and / or SD indicating the S-NSSAI of the mapped HP LMN may be configured.
 また、NSSAI(Network Slice Selection Assistance Information)は、S-NSSAIの集まりである。NSSAIに含まれる、各S-NSSAIはアクセスネットワーク又はコアネットワークがNSIを選択するのをアシストする情報である。UEはPLMNごとにネットワークから許可されたNSSAIを記憶してもよい。また、NSSAIは、AMFを選択するのに用いられる情報であってよい。UEは各NSSAI(allowed NSSAI、及び/又はconfigured NSSAI、及び/又はrejected NSSAI、及び/又pending NSSAI、及び/又第1のNSSAI)を、PLMNとEPLMNに適用させてよい。 NSSAI (Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) is a collection of S-NSSAI. Each S-NSSAI included in NSSAI is information that assists the access network or core network in selecting NSI. The UE may memorize the NSSAI permitted from the network for each PLMN. Also, NSSAI may be the information used to select AMF. The UE may apply each NSSAI (allowed NSSAI and / or configured NSSAI, and / or rejected NSSAI, and / also pending NSSAI, and / or first NSSAI) to PLMN and EPLMN.
 mapped S-NSSAI(マップドS-NSSAI)は、ローミングシナリオにおいて、登録PLMNのS-NSSAIにマッピングされたHPLMNのS-NSSAIである。UEは、configured NSSAIと各アクセスタイプのallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIにマップされたmapped S-NSSAIを1または複数記憶してよい。さらに、UEは、第1のNSSAI、及び/またはrejected NSSAI、及び/又はpending NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIの、mapped S-NSSAIを1または複数記憶してもよい。 Mapped S-NSSAI is an HPLMN S-NSSAI mapped to the registered PLMN S-NSSAI in a roaming scenario. The UE may store one or more mapped S-NSSAI mapped to the configured NSSAI and the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI of each access type. Further, the UE may store one or more mapped S-NSSAI of the first NSSAI and / or the rejected NSSAI and / or the S-NSSAI included in the pending NSSAI.
 Network Slice-Specific Authentication and Authorization(NSSAA)機能とは、ネットワークスライス特有の認証及び認可を実現する為の機能である。ネットワークスライス特有の認証及び認可では、3rd Partyなどコアネットワーク外でUEの認証及び認可を行うことが出来る。NSSAA機能を備える、PLMN及びネットワーク装置は、UEの登録情報に基づき、あるS-NSSAIに対してNSSAA手続きを実行する事ができる。更に、NSSAA機能を備えるUEは、pending NSSAI及び第3のrejected NSSAIを管理、及び記憶、及び送受信する事ができる。本稿では、NSSAAをネットワークスライス特有の認証及び認可手続きや、認証及び認可手続き、として称する場合がある。 The Network Slice-Specific Authentication and Authorization (NSSAA) function is a function for realizing authentication and authorization peculiar to network slices. With network slice-specific authentication and authorization, UE authentication and authorization can be performed outside the core network such as 3rd Party. PLMN and network devices equipped with NSSAA function can execute NSSAA procedure for a certain S-NSSAI based on the registration information of UE. Further, the UE having the NSSAA function can manage, store, and transmit / receive the pending NSSAI and the third rejected NSSAI. In this paper, NSSAA may be referred to as a network slice-specific authentication and authorization procedure or an authentication and authorization procedure.
 NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIは、コアネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置により管理される、NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIである。さらに、NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIは、コアネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置により管理される、NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIがmapped S-NSSAIとなる、HPLMN以外のS-NSSAIであってもよい。 S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA is S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA, which is managed by the core network and / or the core network device. Further, the S-NSSAI requiring NSSAA may be an S-NSSAI other than HPLMN, which is managed by the core network and / or the core network device, and the S-NSSAI requiring NSSAA becomes the mapped S-NSSAI.
 コアネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置は、S-NSSAIとNSSAAを要するか否かを示す情報を対応付けて記憶することにより、NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIを記憶してもよい。コアネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置は、更に、NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIと、NSSAAが完了しているか否かを示す情報、又はNSSAAが完了し許可又は成功している状態であることを示す情報と、を対応づけて記憶してもよい。コアネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置は、NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIをアクセスネットワークに関わらない情報として管理してよい。 The core network and / or the core network device may store S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA by associating and storing information indicating whether S-NSSAI and NSSAA are required. The core network and / or the core network device further indicates that S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA and information indicating whether NSSAA is completed or not, or that NSSAA is completed, permitted, or successful. Information may be stored in association with each other. The core network and / or the core network device may manage S-NSSAI requiring NSSAA as information not related to the access network.
 また、configured NSSAI(設定NSSAI)は、UEの中に供給され、記憶されているNSSAIである。UEは、PLMNごとにconfigured NSSAIを記憶してもよい。UEはPLMNと関連付けてconfigured NSSAIを記憶してもよい。なお、本稿では、PLMNに対応付けられたconfigured NSSAIを、PLMNに対するconfigured NSSAI、又はPLMNのconfigured NSSAI、またはPLMNのためのconfigured NSSAI、PLMNに関連付けられたconfigured NSSAIと表現してもよい。また、UEは、PLMNと関連付けられず、すべてのPLMNに有効なconfigured NSSAIを記憶してよく、そのようなconfigured NSSAIを「default configured NSSAI」としてもよい。 Also, configured NSSAI (configured NSSAI) is NSSAI supplied and stored in the UE. The UE may store the configured NSSAI for each PLMN. The UE may store the configured NSSAI in association with the PLMN. In this paper, the configured NSSAI associated with the PLMN may be expressed as the configured NSSAI for the PLMN, the configured NSSAI for the PLMN, the configured NSSAI for the PLMN, or the configured NSSAI associated with the PLMN. In addition, the UE may store a configured NSSAI that is not associated with the PLMN and is valid for all PLMNs, and such a configured NSSAI may be referred to as a "default configured NSSAI".
 configured NSSAIは複数のPLMNと関連付けられてもよく、これら複数のPLMNはEPLMNであってよい。 The configured NSSAI may be associated with multiple PLMNs, and these multiple PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
 configured NSSAIは、ネットワーク(又はPLMN)により設定された情報であってよい。configured NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIはconfigured S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。configured S-NSSAIは、S-NSSAIとmapped S-NSSAIを含み構成されてもよい。または、PLMNのS-NSSAIは「configured S-NSSAI」、そのconfigured S-NSSAIがHPLMNにマップされたS-NSSAIは「PLMNのためのconfigured NSSAIに対するmapped S-NSSAI」と表現されてもよい。 The configured NSSAI may be information set by the network (or PLMN). S-NSSAI included in configured NSSAI may be expressed as configured S-NSSAI. configured S-NSSAI may be configured to include S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI. Alternatively, the PLMN S-NSSAI may be expressed as "configured S-NSSAI", and the S-NSSAI whose configured S-NSSAI is mapped to the HPLMN may be expressed as "mapped S-NSSAI for the configured NSSAI for PLMN".
 また、requested NSSAI(要求NSSAI)は、登録手続き中にUEからネットワークに提供されるNSSAIである。登録手続きにおいて、UEが送信するrequested NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIは、UEが記憶するallowed NSSAI又はconfigured NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIであってよい。PDUセッション確立手続きにおいて、UEが送信するrequested NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIは、UEが記憶するallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIであってよい。 Also, requested NSSAI (requested NSSAI) is NSSAI provided from the UE to the network during the registration procedure. In the registration procedure, the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI transmitted by the UE may be the allowed NSSAI stored in the UE or the S-NSSAI included in the configured NSSAI. In the PDU session establishment procedure, the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI transmitted by the UE may be the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI stored in the UE.
 requested NSSAIは、UEが要求するネットワークスライスを示す情報であってよい。requested NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIはrequested S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。例えば、requested NSSAIは登録要求メッセージ、又はPDUセッション確立要求メッセージ等のUEからネットワークに送信されるNASメッセージ又はNAS(Non-Access-Stratum )メッセージを含めるRRC(Radio Resource Control)メッセージに含まれて送信される。 The requested NSSAI may be information indicating the network slice requested by the UE. The S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI may be expressed as the requested S-NSSAI. For example, requested NSSAI is included in an RRC (Radio Resource Control) message that includes a NAS message or NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) message sent from the UE to the network, such as a registration request message or PDU session establishment request message. Will be done.
 また、allowed NSSAI(許可NSSAI)は、UEが許可された1又は複数ネットワークスライスを示す情報である。言い換えると、allowed NSSAIは、ネットワークがUEへ接続を許可した、ネットワークスライスを識別する情報である。 Also, allowed NSSAI (permitted NSSAI) is information indicating one or more network slices in which the UE is permitted. In other words, allowed NSSAI is information that identifies the network slice that the network has allowed to connect to the UE.
 UE及び/又はNWは、UEの情報として、アクセス(3GPPアクセス又は非3GPPアクセス)ごとに、allowed NSSAIを記憶と管理してよい。UE及び/又はNWは、さらに、登録エリアと関連付けてallowed NSSAIを管理してもよい。 UE and / or NW may store and manage allowed NSSAI for each access (3GPP access or non-3GPP access) as UE information. The UE and / or NW may also manage allowed NSSAI in association with the registration area.
 さらに、UE及び/又はNWは、UEの情報として、PLMNに関連付けて、allowed NSSAIを記憶と管理してよい。allowed NSSAIは複数のPLMNと関連付けられてもよく、これら複数のPLMNはEPLMNであってよい。 Furthermore, the UE and / or NW may store and manage allowed NSSAI in association with PLMN as UE information. Allowed NSSAI may be associated with multiple PLMNs, and these multiple PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
 なお、本稿では、PLMNとアクセスタイプに対応付けられたallowed NSSAIを、PLMNとアクセスタイプに対するallowed NSSAI、又はPLMNのアクセスタイプに対するallowed NSSAIと表現してもよい。allowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIはallowed S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。allowed S-NSSAIは、S-NSSAIとmapped S-NSSAIを含み構成されてもよい。 In this paper, the allowed NSSAI associated with PLMN and access type may be expressed as allowed NSSAI for PLMN and access type, or allowed NSSAI for PLMN access type. S-NSSAI included in allowed NSSAI may be expressed as allowed S-NSSAI. The allowed S-NSSAI may be configured to include the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI.
 また、rejected NSSAI(拒絶NSSAI)は、UEが許可されない1又は複数のネットワークスライスを示す情報である。言い換えると、rejected NSSAIは、ネットワークがUEに対して接続を許可しないネットワークスライスを識別する情報である。rejected NSSAIは、S-NSSAIと拒絶理由値の組み合わせを、1又は複数含める情報であってもよい。 Also, rejected NSSAI (rejected NSSAI) is information indicating one or more network slices for which the UE is not permitted. In other words, rejected NSSAI is information that identifies network slices that the network does not allow the UE to connect to. The rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason for rejection value.
 ここで、拒絶理由値とは、ネットワークが、対応するS-NSSAIを拒絶する理由を示す情報である。UEとネットワークは、各S-NSSAIを対応づけられた拒絶理由値に基づき、それぞれ適切に、rejected NSSAIを記憶と管理してよい。 Here, the reason for refusal value is information indicating the reason why the network rejects the corresponding S-NSSAI. The UE and the network may appropriately store and manage the rejected NSSAI based on the rejection reason value associated with each S-NSSAI.
 さらに、rejected NSSAIは、登録受諾メッセージや、設定更新コマンドや、登録拒絶メッセージ等、ネットワークからUEへ送信されるNASメッセージ、又はNASメッセージが含まれるRRCメッセージに含められてもよい。rejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIはrejected S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。 Furthermore, rejected NSSAI may be included in the NAS message sent from the network to the UE, such as the registration acceptance message, the setting update command, the registration refusal message, or the RRC message including the NAS message. S-NSSAI included in rejected NSSAI may be expressed as rejected S-NSSAI.
 rejected NSSAIは、第1から第3のrejected NSSAIと、pending NSSAIと、第1のNSSAIの何れかであってもよいし、これらの組み合わせであってよい。rejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIはrejected S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。rejected S-NSSAIは、S-NSSAIとmapped S-NSSAIを含み構成されてもよい。 The rejected NSSAI may be any of the first to third rejected NSSAI, the pending NSSAI, and the first NSSAI, or may be a combination thereof. S-NSSAI included in rejected NSSAI may be expressed as rejected S-NSSAI. The rejected S-NSSAI may be configured to include the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI.
 UE及び/又はNWは、UEの情報として、PLMNに関連付けてrejected NSSAIを記憶と管理してよい。rejected NSSAIは複数のPLMNと関連付けられてもよく、これら複数のPLMNはEPLMNであってよい。 UE and / or NW may store and manage rejected NSSAI in association with PLMN as UE information. The rejected NSSAI may be associated with multiple PLMNs, and these multiple PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
 なお、本稿では、PLMNに関連付けられたrejected NSSAIを、PLMNに対するrejected NSSAI、又はPLMNのrejected NSSAIと表現してもよい。UE及び/又はNWは、さらに、第2のrejected NSSAI、及び/又は第2のrejected S-NSSAIを登録エリアと関連付けて記憶してもよい。UE及び/又はNWは、第2のrejected NSSAI、及び/又は第2のrejected S-NSSAIをアクセスタイプ及び/又は登録エリアと関連付けて記憶してもよい。 In this paper, the rejected NSSAI associated with the PLMN may be expressed as the rejected NSSAI for the PLMN or the rejected NSSAI for the PLMN. The UE and / or NW may further store the second rejected NSSAI and / or the second rejected S-NSSAI in association with the registration area. The UE and / or NW may store the second rejected NSSAI and / or the second rejected S-NSSAI in association with the access type and / or registration area.
 ここで、第1のrejected NSSAIは、UEがrequested NSSAIに含めたS-NSSAIのうち、現在のPLMNで利用不可である、1以上のS-NSSAIの集合である。第1のrejected NSSAIは、5GSのrejected NSSAI for the current PLMNであってもよいし、rejected S-NSSAI for the current PLMNであってもよいし、rejected NSSAI for the current PLMNに含まれるS-NSSAIであってもよい。第1のrejected NSSAIは、UEまたはNWが記憶するrejected NSSAIであってもよいし、NWからUEへ送信されるrejected NSSAIであってよい。第1のrejected NSSAIがNWからUEへ送信されるrejected NSSAIである場合、第1のrejected NSSAIは、S-NSSAIと理由値の組み合わせを、1又は複数含める情報であってもよい。この時の拒絶理由値は、「現在のPLMN又はSNPNで不可であるS-NSSAI(S-NSSAI not available in the current PLMN)」であってよく、拒絶理由値と対応付けられたS-NSSAIが現在のPLMN又はSNPNで不可であることを示す情報であってよい。第1のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIは第1のrejected S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。 Here, the first rejected NSSAI is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs that are not available in the current PLMN among the S-NSSAIs included in the requested NSSAIs by the UE. The first rejected NSSAI may be a 5GS rejected NSSAI for the current PLMN, a rejected S-NSSAI for the current PLMN, or an S-NSSAI included in the rejected NSSAI for the current PLMN. There may be. The first rejected NSSAI may be a rejected NSSAI stored in the UE or NW, or may be a rejected NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE. When the first rejected NSSAI is a rejected NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE, the first rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason value. The reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (S-NSSAI not available in the current PLMN) which is not possible with the current PLMN or SNPN", and the S-NSSAI associated with the reason for refusal value is It may be information indicating that it is not possible with the current PLMN or SNPN. The S-NSSAI included in the first rejected NSSAI may be expressed as the first rejected S-NSSAI.
 第1のrejected NSSAIは、登録PLMN全体に適用されてよい。UE及び/又はNWは、第1のrejected NSSAI及び第1のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIをアクセスタイプによらない情報として扱ってよい。つまり、第1のrejected NSSAIは、3GPP access及びnon-3GPP accessに対して有効な情報であってよい。 The first rejected NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN. The UE and / or NW may treat the S-NSSAI contained in the first rejected NSSAI and the first rejected NSSAI as information regardless of the access type. That is, the first rejected NSSAI may be valid information for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access.
 UEは、現在のPLMNに対して3GPP accessとnon-3GPP accessの両方のアクセスで非登録状態に遷移した場合、第1のrejected NSSAIを記憶から削除してよい。言い換えると、UEが、あるアクセス経由で現在のPLMNに対して非登録状態に遷移した場合、又はあるあるアクセス経由で新しいPLMNに登録が成功した場合、又はあるアクセス経由で新しいPLMNへの登録を失敗し非登録状態に遷移した場合に、さらにUEがもう一方のアクセス経由で登録されていない状態(非登録状態)である場合には、UEは第1のrejected NSSAIを削除する。つまり、UEが、あるアクセス経由で現在のPLMNに対して非登録状態に遷移した場合に、UEがもう一方のアクセス経由で現在のPLMNに対して登録されている状態 (登録状態)である場合には、UEは第1のrejected NSSAIを削除しなくてよい。 The UE may delete the first rejected NSSAI from the memory when it transitions to the unregistered state with both 3GPP access and non-3GPP access to the current PLMN. In other words, if the UE transitions to the unregistered state with respect to the current PLMN via one access, or successfully registers with the new PLMN via one access, or registers with the new PLMN via one access. If the UE fails and transitions to the unregistered state, and the UE is not registered via the other access (unregistered state), the UE deletes the first rejected NSSAI. That is, when the UE transitions to the unregistered state for the current PLMN via one access, the UE is registered for the current PLMN via the other access (registered state). The UE does not have to delete the first rejected NSSAI.
 第2のrejected NSSAIは、UEがrequested NSSAIに含めたS-NSSAIのうち、現在のレジストレーションエリア内で利用不可である、1又は複数のS-NSSAIの集合である。第2のrejected NSSAIは、5GSのrejected NSSAI for the current registration areaであってよい。第2のrejected NSSAIは、UEまたはNWが記憶するrejected NSSAIであってもよいし、NWからUEへ送信されるrejected NSSAIであってよい。第2のrejected NSSAIがNWからUEへ送信されるrejected NSSAIである場合、第2のrejected NSSAIは、S-NSSAIと理由値の組み合わせを、1又は複数含める情報であってもよい。この時の拒絶理由値は、「現在のレジストレーションエリアで不可であるS-NSSAI(S-NSSAI not available in the current registration area)」であってよく、理由値と対応付けられたS-NSSAIが現在のレジストレーションエリア内で不可であることを示す情報であってよい。第2のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIは第2のrejected S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。 The second rejected NSSAI is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs that are not available in the current registration area among the S-NSSAIs that the UE has included in the requested NSSAIs. The second rejected NSSAI may be a 5GS rejected NSSAI for the current registration area. The second rejected NSSAI may be a rejected NSSAI stored in the UE or NW, or may be a rejected NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE. When the second rejected NSSAI is a rejected NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE, the second rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason value. The reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (S-NSSAI not available in the current registration area) that is not possible in the current registration area", and the S-NSSAI associated with the reason value is It may be information indicating that it is not possible in the current registration area. The S-NSSAI included in the second rejected NSSAI may be expressed as the second rejected S-NSSAI.
 第2のrejected NSSAIは、現在のレジストレーションエリア内で有効であってよく、現在のレジストレーションエリアに適用されてもよい。UE及び/又はNWは、第2のrejected NSSAI及び第2のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIをアクセスタイプごとの情報として扱ってよい。つまり、第2のrejected NSSAIは、3GPP accessまたはnon-3GPP accessのそれぞれに対して有効な情報であってよい。つまり、UEは、一旦あるアクセスに対して非登録状態に遷移した場合は、そのアクセスに関連付けられた第2のrejected NSSAIを記憶から削除してよい。 The second rejected NSSAI may be valid within the current registration area and may be applied to the current registration area. The UE and / or NW may treat the S-NSSAI contained in the second rejected NSSAI and the second rejected NSSAI as information for each access type. That is, the second rejected NSSAI may be valid information for each of 3GPP access and non-3GPP access. That is, once the UE transitions to the unregistered state for a certain access, the UE may delete the second rejected NSSAI associated with the access from the memory.
 第3のrejected NSSAIは、NSSAAを要するS-NSSAIであり、そのS-NSSAIに対するNSSAAが失敗された、または取り消された、1又は複数のS-NSSAIの集合である。第3のrejected NSSAIは、UE及び/またはNWが記憶するNSSAIであってもよいし、NWとUE間で送受信されるNSSAIであってもよい。第3のrejected NSSAIがNWからUEへ送信される場合、第3のrejected NSSAIは、S-NSSAIと拒絶理由値の組み合わせを、1又は複数含める情報であってもよい。この時の拒絶理由値は、「NSSAAの失敗または取り消しのために不可であるS-NSSAI(S-NSSAI not available due to the failed or revoked NSSAA)」であってよく、拒絶理由値と対応付けられたS-NSSAIに対するNSSAAが失敗したことまたは取り消されたことを示す情報であってよい。第3のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIは第3のrejected S-NSSAIと表現されてもよい。 The third rejected NSSAI is an S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA, and is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs for which NSSAA for that S-NSSAI has failed or has been revoked. The third rejected NSSAI may be an NSSAI stored in the UE and / or the NW, or may be an NSSAI transmitted / received between the NW and the UE. When the third rejected NSSAI is transmitted from the NW to the UE, the third rejected NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason for refusal value. The reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (S-NSSAI not available due to the failed or revoked NSSAA) which is impossible due to the failure or cancellation of NSSAA" and is associated with the reason for refusal value. It may be information indicating that NSSAA for S-NSSAI has failed or has been cancelled. The S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI may be expressed as the third rejected S-NSSAI.
 第3のrejected NSSAIは、登録PLMN全体に適用されてもよいし、登録PLMN及び/またはEPLMNに適用されてもよいし、全てのPLMNに適用されてもよい。第3のrejected NSSAIが全てのPLMNに適用されるということは、第3のrejected NSSAIはPLMNに関連付けられないことを意味してもよいし、第3のrejected NSSAIはHPLMNに関連付けられることを意味してよい。 The third rejected NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN, to the registered PLMN and / or EPLMN, or to all PLMNs. The fact that the third rejected NSSAI applies to all PLMNs may mean that the third rejected NSSAI is not associated with the PLMN, and that the third rejected NSSAI is associated with the HPLMN. You can do it.
 さらに、UE及び/又はNWは、第3のrejected NSSAI及び第3のrejected S-NSSAIをアクセスタイプによらない情報として扱ってよい。つまり、第3のrejected NSSAIは、3GPP access及びnon-3GPP accessに対して有効な情報であってよい。第3のrejected NSSAIはrejected NSSAIとは異なるNSSAIであってもよい。第3のrejected NSSAIは第1のrejected NSSAIであってもよい。第3のrejected NSSAIは、5GSのrejected NSSAI for the failed or revoked NSSAAであってもよいし、rejected S-NSSAI for the failed or revoked NSSAAであってもよいし、rejected NSSAI for the failed or revoked NSSAAに含まれるS-NSSAIであってもよい。 Furthermore, the UE and / or NW may treat the third rejected NSSAI and the third rejected S-NSSAI as information that does not depend on the access type. That is, the third rejected NSSAI may be valid information for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access. The third rejected NSSAI may be an NSSAI different from the rejected NSSAI. The third rejected NSSAI may be the first rejected NSSAI. The third rejected NSSAI may be a 5GS rejected NSSAI for the failed or revoked NSSAA, a rejected S-NSSAI for the failed or revoked NSSAA, or a rejected NSSAI for the failed or revoked NS. It may be the included S-NSSAI.
 第3のrejected NSSAIは、UEが、コアネットワークからNSSAAが失敗したこと、または取り消されたことにより拒絶されたスライスを識別するrejected NSSAIである。具体的には、UEは第3のrejected NSSAIを記憶する間、第3のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIに対する登録要求手続きを開始しない。第3のrejected NSSAIは、NSSAAの失敗を示す拒絶理由値と対応づけられてコアネットワークから受信したS-NSSAIを1又は複数含む識別情報であってよい。第3のrejected NSSAIは、アクセスタイプによらない情報である。具体的には、UEが第3のrejected NSSAIを記憶する場合、UEは第3のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを含む登録要求メッセージを、3GPPアクセスとnon-3GPPアクセスの両方に送信を試みなくてもよい。または、UEは第3のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを含む登録要求メッセージを、UEポリシーに基づき送信する事ができる。または、UEは第3のrejected NSSAIを、UEポリシーに基づき削除し、第3のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを含む登録要求メッセージを送信できる状態に遷移してもよい。言い換えれば、UEは第3のrejected NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを含む登録要求メッセージを、UEポリシーに基づき送信する場合には、UEは第3のrejected NSSAIからそのS-NSSAIを削除してもよい。 The third rejected NSSAI is a rejected NSSAI in which the UE identifies slices rejected due to NSSAA failure or cancellation from the core network. Specifically, the UE does not start the registration request procedure for the S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI while storing the third rejected NSSAI. The third rejected NSSAI may be identification information including one or more S-NSSAI received from the core network in association with the rejection reason value indicating the failure of NSSAA. The third rejected NSSAI is information that does not depend on the access type. Specifically, if the UE remembers the third rejected NSSAI, the UE attempts to send a registration request message containing the S-NSSAI contained in the third rejected NSSAI to both 3GPP and non-3GPP access. It does not have to be. Alternatively, the UE can send a registration request message including S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI based on the UE policy. Alternatively, the UE may delete the third rejected NSSAI based on the UE policy and transition to a state in which a registration request message including the S-NSSAI included in the third rejected NSSAI can be transmitted. In other words, if the UE sends a registration request message containing the S-NSSAI contained in the third rejected NSSAI based on the UE policy, the UE may delete the S-NSSAI from the third rejected NSSAI. good.
 第1のNSSAIは、ネットワークスライス毎の最大UE数に達したS-NSSAIを一又は複数含む情報である。第1のNSSAIは、rejected NSSAIであってもよいし、allowed NSSAIであってもよいし、pending NSSAIであってもよい。第1の NSSAIは、UE及び/またはNWが記憶するNSSAIであってもよいし、NWからUEへ送信されるNSSAIであってよい。 The first NSSAI is information including one or more S-NSSAIs that have reached the maximum number of UEs for each network slice. The first NSSAI may be rejected NSSAI, allowed NSSAI, or pending NSSAI. The first NSSAI may be an NSSAI stored in the UE and / or the NW, or may be an NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE.
 第1のNSSAIがNWからUEへ送信される場合、第1のNSSAIは、S-NSSAIとマップドS-NSSAIと、拒絶理由値と、バックオフタイマの値と、バックオフタイマの値の有効期範囲を示す情報と、を少なくとも1つ含む情報を、1又は複数含める情報であってもよい。この時の拒絶理由値は、「ネットワークスライス毎の最大UE数に達したS-NSSAI」であってよく、拒絶理由値と対応付けられたS-NSSAIに許可できる最大UE数に達したことを示す情報であってよい。ここで、拒絶理由値は、rejected NSSAIに含まれる拒絶理由値であってもよいし、フラグ情報であってもよいし、5GMM causeであってもよい。さらに、この時、バックオフタイマの値は、UEが対応するS-NSSAIまたはマップドS-NSSAIに関するS-NSSAIを用いた、MMメッセージを送信すること、及びSMメッセージを送信することを禁止する期間を示す情報であってよい。 When the first NSSAI is sent from the NW to the UE, the first NSSAI is the S-NSSAI and the mapped S-NSSAI, the rejection reason value, the backoff timer value, and the validity period of the backoff timer value. The information may include one or a plurality of information indicating a range and information including at least one. The reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI that has reached the maximum number of UEs for each network slice", and that the maximum number of UEs that can be allowed for S-NSSAI associated with the reason for refusal value has been reached. It may be the information to be shown. Here, the reason for refusal value may be the reason for refusal value included in rejected NSSAI, flag information, or 5 GMM cause. Further, at this time, the value of the backoff timer is the period during which the UE is prohibited from transmitting the MM message and the SM message using the corresponding S-NSSAI or S-NSSAI related to the mapped S-NSSAI. It may be information indicating.
 さらに、バックオフタイマの値の有効期範囲を示す情報は、バックオフタイマの値が、現在のPLMN(Public Land Mobile Network)に適用されるか、全てのPLMNに適用されるか、現在のregistration areaで有効かを示す情報であってよい。 Furthermore, the information indicating the valid period range of the backoff timer value is whether the backoff timer value is applied to the current PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network), all PLMNs, or the current registration. It may be information indicating whether the area is valid.
 第1のNSSAIは、登録PLMN全体に適用されてよいし、すべてのPLMNに有効であってもよいし、適用されてもよいし、登録エリア内で有効であってもよいし、登録PLMNとEPLMNに適用されてもよいし、TAリスト(TAI listまたは登録エリア)に含まれるTAIが属する一又は複数のPLMNに適用されてもよい。第1のNSSAIが全てのPLMNに適用されるということは、第1のNSSAIはPLMNに関連付けられないことを意味してもよいし、第1のNSSAIはHPLMNに関連付けられることを意味してよい。 The first NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN, may be valid for all PLMNs, may be applied, may be valid within the registered area, and may be with the registered PLMN. It may be applied to the EPLMN, or it may be applied to one or more PLMNs to which the TAI included in the TA list (TAI list or registration area) belongs. The fact that the first NSSAI applies to all PLMNs may mean that the first NSSAI is not associated with the PLMN, or that the first NSSAI is associated with the HPLMN. ..
 第1のNSSAIが、登録PLMN全体で有効である場合、またはすべてのPLMNで適用される場合、または登録PLMN及び/またはEPLMNに適用される場合、UE及び/又はNWは、第1のNSSAI及び第1のNSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIをアクセスタイプによらない情報として扱ってよい。第1のNSSAIが、登録エリア内で有効である場合、またはTAリスト(TAI listまたは登録エリア)に含まれるTAIが属する一又は複数のPLMNに適用される場合、UE及び/又はNWは、第1のNSSAI及び第1のNSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIをアクセスタイプごとの情報として扱ってよい。 If the first NSSAI is valid for the entire registered PLMN, or if it applies to all PLMNs, or if it applies to the registered PLMN and / or EPLMN, then the UE and / or NW will be the first NSSAI and / or NW. The S-NSSAI included in the first NSSAI may be treated as information that does not depend on the access type. If the first NSSAI is valid within the registration area, or if it applies to one or more PLMNs to which the TAI contained in the TA list (TAI list or registration area) belongs, the UE and / or NW will be the first. The NSSAI of 1 and the S-NSSAI included in the 1st NSSAI may be treated as information for each access type.
 第1のNSSAIは、allowed NSSAIであってもよいし、rejected NSSAIであってもよいし、pending NSSAIであってもよいし、これらとは異なる情報であってもよい。 The first NSSAI may be allowed NSSAI, rejected NSSAI, pending NSSAI, or information different from these.
 pending NSSAI(ペンディングNSSAI)は、UEが利用することがペンディング、及び/又は不可である、1又は複数のS-NSSAIの集合である。pending NSSAIは、ネットワークがnetwork slice specific authenticationを要するS-NSSAIであり、network slice specific authenticationが完了していないS-NSSAIの集合であってもよい。pending NSSAIは、5GSのpending NSSAIであってよい。pending NSSAIは、UE及び/またはNWが記憶するNSSAIであってもよいし、NWとUE間で送受信されるNSSAIであってよい。 Pending NSSAI is a set of one or more S-NSSAIs that the UE cannot and / or cannot use. The pending NSSAI is an S-NSSAI whose network requires network slice specific authentication, and may be a set of S-NSSAI whose network slice specific authentication has not been completed. The pending NSSAI may be a 5GS pending NSSAI. The pending NSSAI may be an NSSAI stored in the UE and / or the NW, or may be an NSSAI transmitted / received between the NW and the UE.
 pending NSSAIがNWからUEへ送信されるNSSAIである場合、pending NSSAIは、S-NSSAIと拒絶理由値の組み合わせを、1又は複数含める情報であってもよい。この時の拒絶理由値は、「NSSAAのためにペンディングするS-NSSAI(NSSAA is pending for the S-NSSAI)」であってよく、拒絶理由値と対応付けられたS-NSSAIが、そのS-NSSAIに対するNSSAAを完了するまでUEが使用するのを禁止またはペンディングすることを示す情報であってよい。 When the pending NSSAI is an NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE, the pending NSSAI may be information that includes one or more combinations of the S-NSSAI and the reason for refusal value. The reason for refusal value at this time may be "S-NSSAI (NSSAA is pending for the S-NSSAI)", and the S-NSSAI associated with the reason for refusal value is the S-NSSAI. It may be information indicating that the UE is prohibited or pending from use until the completion of NSSAA for NSSAI.
 pending NSSAIがNWからUEへ送信されるNSSAIである場合、pending NSSAIは、S-NSSAIとmapped S-NSSAIの組み合わせの集合であってもよい。 If the pending NSSAI is an NSSAI transmitted from the NW to the UE, the pending NSSAI may be a set of combinations of S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI.
 pending NSSAIは、登録PLMN全体に適用されてもよいし、登録PLMNと登録PLMNの一又は複数のEPLMNで適用されてもよいし、全てのPLMNに適用されてもよい。pending NSSAIが全てのPLMNに適用されるということは、pending NSSAIはPLMNに関連付けられないことを意味してもよいし、pending NSSAIはHPLMNに関連付けられることを意味してよい。 The pending NSSAI may be applied to the entire registered PLMN, one or more EPLMNs of the registered PLMN and the registered PLMN, or all PLMNs. The fact that the pending NSSAI applies to all PLMNs may mean that the pending NSSAI is not associated with the PLMN, or that the pending NSSAI is associated with the HPLMN.
 UE及び/又はNWは、pending NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIをアクセスタイプによらない情報として扱ってよい。つまり、pending NSSAIは、3GPP access及びnon-3GPP accessに対して有効な情報であってよい。pending NSSAIはrejected NSSAIとは異なるNSSAIであってもよい。pending NSSAIは第1のrejected NSSAIであってもよい。 UE and / or NW may treat S-NSSAI included in pending NSSAI as information that does not depend on the access type. That is, pending NSSAI may be valid information for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access. The pending NSSAI may be an NSSAI different from the rejected NSSAI. The pending NSSAI may be the first rejected NSSAI.
 pending NSSAIは、UEが、手続きをペンディングしているスライスを識別する1又は複数のS-NSSAIで構成されるNSSAIである。具体的には、UEは、pending NSSAIを記憶する間、pending NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIに対する登録要求手続きを開始しない。言い換えれば、UEは、pending NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIに対するNSSAAが完了するまで、pending NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを登録手続き中に使用しない。pending NSSAIは、アクセスタイプによらない情報である。具体的には、UEがpending NSSAIを記憶する場合、UEはpending NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを含む登録要求メッセージを、3GPPアクセスとnon-3GPPアクセスの両方に送信を試みない。 Pending NSSAI is an NSSAI composed of one or more S-NSSAIs in which the UE identifies the slice that is pending the procedure. Specifically, the UE does not start the registration request procedure for the S-NSSAI included in the pending NSSAI while storing the pending NSSAI. In other words, the UE will not use the S-NSSAI contained in the pending NSSAI during the registration process until the NSSAA for the S-NSSAI contained in the pending NSSAI is completed. pending NSSAI is information that does not depend on the access type. Specifically, when the UE stores the pending NSSAI, the UE does not attempt to send the registration request message including the S-NSSAI included in the pending NSSAI to both 3GPP access and non-3GPP access.
 トラッキングエリアは、コアネットワークが管理する、UE_A10の位置情報で表すことが可能な単数又は複数の範囲である。トラッキングエリアは、複数のセルで構成されもよい。さらに、トラッキングエリアは、ページング等の制御メッセージがブロードキャストされる範囲でもよいし、UE_A10がハンドオーバー手続きをせずに移動できる範囲でもよい。さらに、トラッキングエリアは、ルーティングエリアでもよいし、ロケーションエリアでもよいし、これらと同様のものであればよい。以下、トラッキングエリアはTA(Tracking Area)であってもよい。トラッキングエリアは、TAC(Tracking area code)とPLMNで構成されるTAI(Tracking Area Identity)により識別されてよい。 The tracking area is a single or multiple range managed by the core network that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10. The tracking area may be composed of a plurality of cells. Further, the tracking area may be a range in which a control message such as paging is broadcast, or a range in which UE_A10 can move without performing a handover procedure. Further, the tracking area may be a routing area, a location area, or the same as these. Hereinafter, the tracking area may be TA (Tracking Area). The tracking area may be identified by a TAI (Tracking Area Identity) composed of TAC (Tracking area code) and PLMN.
 レジストレーションエリア(Registration area又は登録エリア)は、AMFがUEに割り当てる1又は複数のTAの集合である。なお、UE_A10は、レジストレーションエリアに含まれる一又は複数のTA内を移動している間は、トラッキングエリア更新のための信号を送受信することなく移動することができてよい。言い換えると、レジストレーションエリアは、UE_A10がトラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行することなく移動できるエリアを示す情報群であってよい。レジストレーションエリアは、1または複数のTAIにより構成されるTAI listにより識別されてよい。 The registration area (Registration area or registration area) is a set of one or more TAs assigned to the UE by AMF. Note that UE_A10 may be able to move without transmitting and receiving a signal for updating the tracking area while moving within one or a plurality of TAs included in the registration area. In other words, the registration area may be a group of information indicating an area in which UE_A10 can move without executing the tracking area update procedure. The registration area may be identified by a TAI list consisting of one or more TAIs.
 TAI listに含まれるTAIは、1つのPLMNに属してよいし、複数のPLMNに属してもよい。TAI listに含まれる複数のTAIが異なるPLMNに属する場合、それらPLMNはEPLMNであってよい。 The TAI included in the TAI list may belong to one PLMN or may belong to a plurality of PLMNs. If multiple TAIs included in the TAI list belong to different PLMNs, those PLMNs may be EPLMNs.
 UE IDとは、UEを識別する為の情報である。具体的に、例えば、UE IDは、SUCI(SUbscription Concealed Identifier)、又はSUPI(Subscription Permanent Identifier )、又はGUTI(Globally Unique Temporary Identifier)、又はIMEI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)、又はIMEISV(IMEI Software Version)又は、TMSI(Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity )であってもよい。又は、UE IDはアプリケーションまたはネットワーク内で設定されたその他の情報であってもよい。さらに、UE IDは、ユーザを識別する為の情報であってもよい。 UE ID is information for identifying the UE. Specifically, for example, the UE ID is SUCI (SUbscription Concealed Identifier), SUPI (Subscription Permanent Identifier), GUTI (Globally Unique Temporary Identifier), IMEI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity), or IME ISV (IMEI Software Version). Alternatively, it may be TMSI (Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity). Alternatively, the UE ID may be other information set in the application or network. Further, the UE ID may be information for identifying the user.
 スライスに接続する最大UE数管理とは、同時にネットワークスライスまたはS-NSSAIに登録できる最大UE数を管理することである。ここで、ネットワークスライスまたはS-NSSAIに登録するUEとは、ネットワークスライスを示すS-NSSAIがallowed NSSAIに含まれて記憶することであってもよい。スライスに接続する最大UE数管理の機能をサポートネットワーク内の装置は、S-NSSAIごとに、スライスに接続する最大UE数管理を要するか否かを記憶することができ、さらに登録されたUEが最大数である定数に達しているか否かを登録手続き中に確認することができる。さらに、スライスに接続する最大UE数管理の機能をサポートする各装置は、第1のNSSAIを記憶することができてよい。本稿では、スライスに接続する最大UE数は、スライス毎に接続する最大UE数、またはネットワークスライスまたはS-NSSAIに登録できる最大UE数、または最大UE数、または定数、と表現される場合がある。 Management of the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice is to manage the maximum number of UEs that can be registered in the network slice or S-NSSAI at the same time. Here, the UE registered in the network slice or S-NSSAI may mean that the S-NSSAI indicating the network slice is included in the allowed NSSAI and stored. Supports the function of managing the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice The device in the network can memorize whether or not the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice needs to be managed for each S-NSSAI, and the registered UEs It can be confirmed during the registration procedure whether or not the maximum number of constants has been reached. In addition, each device that supports the function of managing the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice may be able to store the first NSSAI. In this paper, the maximum number of UEs connected to a slice may be expressed as the maximum number of UEs connected for each slice, the maximum number of UEs that can be registered in a network slice or S-NSSAI, the maximum number of UEs, or a constant. ..
 バックオフタイマは、UEによるMMメッセージの送信、及び/又はSMメッセージによる手続きの開始を禁止するためのタイマであり。バックオフタイマは、UEにより管理、実行される。バックオフタイマはS-NSSAIに対応づけられていてもよい。UEは、S-NSSAIに対応付けられたバックオフタイマが有効である間は、そのS-NSSAIを用いた、MMメッセージの送信、及び/又はSMメッセージの送信、が禁止、又は規制、又は制限された状態であってよい。これらの規制は5GSの輻輳管理による規制であってもよいし、5GSの輻輳管理による規制を含めた規制であってもよい。 The backoff timer is a timer for prohibiting the transmission of MM messages by the UE and / or the start of procedures by SM messages. The backoff timer is managed and executed by the UE. The backoff timer may be associated with S-NSSAI. The UE prohibits, restricts, or restricts the transmission of MM messages and / or the transmission of SM messages using the S-NSSAI while the backoff timer associated with the S-NSSAI is valid. It may be in the state of being done. These regulations may be regulations based on 5GS congestion management, or may be regulations including regulations based on 5GS congestion management.
 バックオフタイマは、S-NSSAI、及び/又はPLMN単位で、開始、及び/又は停止されるタイマであってよい。 The backoff timer may be a timer that is started and / or stopped in units of S-NSSAI and / or PLMN.
 具体的には、バックオフタイマは、S-NSSAIに対応付けられてよく、特定のS-NSSAIを用いた、MMメッセージ、及び/又はSMメッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマであってよい。言い換えると、UEは、このタイマのカウント中は、その特定のS-NSSAIを用いたMMメッセージ、及び/又はSMメッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。 Specifically, the backoff timer may be associated with S-NSSAI, and may be a timer for prohibiting the transmission of MM messages and / or SM messages using a specific S-NSSAI. In other words, the UE may be configured not to send MM and / or SM messages using that particular S-NSSAI while this timer is counting.
 さらに、UEは、このタイマのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたMMメッセージ、及び/又はSMメッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていた、MMメッセージ、及び/又はSMメッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、バックオフタイマに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAI、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIに関連するS-NSSAI、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIのマップドS-NSSAIに関連するS-NSSAI、を用いたMMメッセージ、及び/又はSMメッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。 In addition, the UE will allow the new PLMN to send MM and / or SM messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. It may be set. If it is expressed that the transmission of MM message and / or SM message, which was prohibited by PLMN before the change, is allowed, the same S-NSSAI and / as S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer. Or it is permissible to send MM messages and / or SM messages using S-NSSAI related to the same S-NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI related to the same S-NSSAI mapped S-NSSAI. It may mean.
 さらに、バックオフタイマは、特定のNSSAIを用いた、MMメッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマであってよい。言い換えると、UEは、このタイマのカウント中は、その特定のNSSAI、及び/又は特定のS-NSSAIを含むNSSAIを用いたMMメッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。 Furthermore, the backoff timer may be a timer for prohibiting the transmission of MM messages using a specific NSSAI. In other words, the UE may be configured not to send MM messages using that particular NSSAI and / or NSSAI containing a particular S-NSSAI while this timer is counting.
 さらに、UEは、このタイマのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたMMメッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていた、MMメッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、バックオフタイマに対応付けられたNSSAIと同じNSSAI、及び/又はバックオフタイマに対応付けられたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIを含むNSSAIを用いたMMメッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。さらに、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていた、MMメッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、バックオフタイマに対応付けられたS-NSSAIに関連するS-NSSAIを含むNSSAI、及び/又はバックオフタイマに対応付けられたS-NSSAIのマップドS-NSSAIに関連するS-NSSAIを含むNSSAIを用いたMMメッセージの送信が許容されることを意味してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE may be set to allow the transmission of MM messages prohibited by the PLMN before the change in the new PLMN based on the specific conditions described later during the counting of this timer. If it is expressed that the transmission of MM messages, which was prohibited by the PLMN before the change, is allowed, the same NSSAI as the NSSAI associated with the backoff timer and / or the S associated with the backoff timer. -It may mean that the transmission of MM messages using NSSAI containing the same S-NSSAI as NSSAI is allowed. Furthermore, if it is expressed that the transmission of MM messages, which was prohibited by PLMN before the change, is allowed, NSSAI including S-NSSAI related to S-NSSAI associated with the backoff timer, and / or back. It may mean that the transmission of MM messages using NSSAI including S-NSSAI related to the mapped S-NSSAI of S-NSSAI associated with the off-timer is allowed.
 また、バックオフタイマは、no NSSAIに対応付けられ、no NSSAIを用いたMMメッセージの送信を禁止するためのタイマであってもよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、このタイマのカウント中は、no NSSAIを用いたMMメッセージを送信しないよう設定してもよい。さらに、UE_A10は、このタイマのカウント中に、後述する特定の条件に基づいて、新しいPLMNにおいて、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたMMメッセージの送信が許容されるように設定してもよい。尚、変更前のPLMNで禁止されていたMMメッセージの送信が許容されると表現した場合、no NSSAIを用いたMMメッセージが許容されることを意味してもよい。 Further, the backoff timer may be a timer associated with noNSSAI and prohibiting the transmission of the MM message using noNSSAI. In other words, UE_A10 may be set not to send MM messages using noNSSAI during the counting of this timer. In addition, UE_A10 may be set to allow the new PLMN to send MM messages that were prohibited by the PLMN before the change, based on certain conditions described below, during the counting of this timer. In addition, when it is expressed that the transmission of the MM message prohibited by the PLMN before the change is permitted, it may mean that the MM message using no NSSAI is permitted.
 さらに、バックオフタイマは、5GMMのタイマ、及び/又はEMM(EPS mobility management)のタイマであってもよい。さらに、バックオフタイマは、タイマT3448であってもよいし、タイマT3448と同等のタイマであってもよい。言い換えると、バックオフタイマは、コントロールプレーンを介したユーザデータの通信を規制するためのタイマと、同じタイマであってもよいし、同様のタイマであってもよい。 Furthermore, the backoff timer may be a 5 GMM timer and / or an EMM (EPS mobility management) timer. Further, the backoff timer may be a timer T3448 or a timer equivalent to the timer T3448. In other words, the backoff timer may be the same timer as the timer for regulating the communication of user data via the control plane, or may be the same timer.
 次に、本実施形態において、各装置により送受信、及び記憶管理される識別情報について説明する。 Next, in the present embodiment, the identification information transmitted / received and stored and managed by each device will be described.
 本実施形態における第1の識別情報は、UE_A10が要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))と、UEが要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))をサポートする訪問先のPLMN(visited PLMN; vPLMN)又はEHPLMNを関連付けて組み合わされた情報をネットワークから受信し、認識し、処理し、記憶する機能をサポートすることを示すUE_A10の能力情報(capability)であってよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、UE_A10が前記機能をサポートするか否かを示すUEの能力情報であってもよい。 The first identification information in the present embodiment includes NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted by UE_A10 and NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted by UE. With the capability information (capacity) of UE_A10 indicating that it supports the function of receiving, recognizing, processing, and storing the combined information from the network in association with the PLMN (visited PLMN; vPLMN) or EHPLMN of the visited visit. It may be there. Further, the first identification information may be UE capability information indicating whether UE_A10 supports the function.
 又は、第1の識別情報は、UE_A10が要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))のみをサポートする1又は複数のPLMN(のみ)を含む情報をコアネットワークから受信し、認識し、処理する機能をサポートすることを示すUE_A10の能力情報であってよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、UE_A10が前記機能をサポートするか否かを示すUEの能力情報であってもよい。 Alternatively, the first identifying information receives and recognizes from the core network information containing one or more PLMNs (only) that UE_A10 supports only the requested and / or authorized NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)). However, it may be UE_A10 capability information indicating that it supports the function to process. Further, the first identification information may be UE capability information indicating whether UE_A10 supports the function.
 更に、第1の識別情報は、UE_A10がコアネットワークに、UE_A10が要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAIとUE_A10が要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAIをサポートするvPLMNを関連付けて組み合わせた情報をサポートするvPLMN又はEHPLMNの情報又は、UE_A10が要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAIをサポートするvPLMNの情報を生成処理及び送信する為の機能をサポートすることを示すコアネットワークの能力情報を要求するための識別情報であってよい。 In addition, the first identifying information is a vPLMN that supports a combination of UE_A10 in the core network, UE_A10 requesting and / or allowed NSSAI and UE_A10 supporting vPLMN supporting requested and / or allowed NSSAI. Or with EHPLMN information or identification information to request core network capability information indicating that UE_A10 supports the ability to generate, process and transmit vPLMN information that supports the requested and / or authorized NSSAI. It may be there.
 尚、前述のUE_A10がネットワークから受信し、認識し、処理するNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))とPLMN IDの組み合わせは、1つのPLMN IDに1つのS-NSSAIが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよいし、1つのPLMN IDに対して複数のS-NSSAIが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよいし、1つのS-NSSAIに複数のPLMN IDが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよい。 The combination of NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) and PLMNID that UE_A10 receives from the network, recognizes, and processes is the information that one PLMNID is associated with one S-NSSAI. It may be information in which multiple S-NSSAIs are associated and combined for one PLMNID, or information in which multiple PLMNIDs are associated and combined in one S-NSSAI. There may be.
 第1の識別情報は、UE_A10が拡張されたSOR(Steering of Roaming)透過コンテナ情報要素(SOR transparent container IE)を記憶する機能を備えることを示す情報であってもよいし、拡張されたallowed NSSAIを記憶する機能を備えることを示す情報であってもよい。 The first identification information may be information indicating that UE_A10 has a function of storing an extended SOR (Steering of Roaming) transparent container information element (SOR transparent container IE), or may be information indicating that the UE_A10 has an extended allowed NSSAI. It may be information indicating that it has a function of storing.
 本実施形態における第2の識別情報は、コアネットワークが、UE_A10が要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))をサポートするUE_A10の訪問先のPLMN(visited PLMN; vPLMN)を選択し、更に、選択したPLMN情報(PLMN ID)をUE_A10に送信する機能をサポートすることを示すコアネットワークの能力情報(capability)であってよい。さらに、第2の識別情報は、コアネットワークが前記機能をサポートするか否かを示すコアネットワークの能力情報であってもよい。 For the second identification information in the present embodiment, the core network selects the PLMN (visited PLMN; vPLMN) of the UE_A10 visit that supports the NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted by the UE_A10. In addition, it may be the capability information of the core network indicating that it supports the function of transmitting the selected PLMN information (PLMN ID) to UE_A10. Further, the second identification information may be the capability information of the core network indicating whether or not the core network supports the above function.
 ここで、コアネットワークがUE_A10に送信するPLMN情報は、UE_A10がコアネットワークに要求及び/又はコアネットワークから許可されたNSSAIと関連付けて組み合わされた情報であってもよいし、前述の選択されたPLMN情報(PLMN ID)のみであってもよい。 Here, the PLMN information transmitted by the core network to the UE_A10 may be the information combined with the NSSAI requested by the core network and / or permitted from the core network, or may be the PLMN information selected as described above. It may be only information (PLMN ID).
 更に、コアネットワークがPLMN情報をNSSAI(スライス情報)と関連付けて組み合わされた情報として送信する場合、1つのPLMN IDに1つのS-NSSAIが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよいし、1つのPLMN IDに対して複数のS-NSSAIが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよいし、1つのS-NSSAIに複数のPLMN IDが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよい。 Furthermore, when the core network sends PLMN information as combined information in association with NSSAI (slice information), it may be information in which one S-NSSAI is associated with one PLMN ID and combined, or 1 The information may be a combination of a plurality of S-NSSAIs associated with one PLMNID, or may be a combination of a plurality of PLMNIDs associated with a single S-NSSAI.
 本実施形態における第3の識別情報は、UE_A10が、移動先のネットワークとして使用可能な1又は複数のPLMN (vPLMN(s))を識別する情報(PLMN ID)及び、各PLMNがサポートしているNSSAI (S-NSSAI(s))が関連付けて組み合わされた情報であってよく、更に、このような組み合わされた情報が複数含まれた情報であってよい。 The third identification information in the present embodiment is the information (PLMN ID) that UE_A10 identifies one or more PLMNs (vPLMN (s)) that can be used as the destination network, and each PLMN supports it. The information may be a combination of NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) in association with each other, and may be information including a plurality of such combined information.
 尚、PLMN IDとNSSAIの組み合わせは、1つのPLMN IDに1つのS-NSSAIが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよいし、1つのPLMN IDに対して複数のS-NSSAIが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよいし、複数のPLMN IDに1つのS-NSSAIが関連付けられ組み合わされた情報であってもよい。 The combination of PLMN ID and NSSAI may be information in which one S-NSSAI is associated with one PLMN ID and combined, or a plurality of S-NSSAI are associated and combined with one PLMN ID. It may be the information that has been created, or it may be the information that one S-NSSAI is associated with and combined with a plurality of PLMN IDs.
 ここで、第3の識別情報に含まれるPLMN情報(PLMN ID)は、UE_A10がホームネットワーク(home PLMN; hPLMN)において、要求及び/又は許可されたS-NSSAIに基づいて、コアネットワークが選択した1又は複数のPLMN IDであってよい。 Here, the PLMN information (PLMN ID) included in the third identification information is selected by the core network based on the S-NSSAI requested and / or permitted by UE_A10 in the home network (home PLMN; hPLMN). It may be one or more PLMN IDs.
 また、更に、第3の識別情報は、PLMN IDとS-NSSAIとの関連付けに加え、アクセス技術を示す情報(access technology;PLMN Access Technology Identifier)が更に関連付けられた1又は複数の組み合わせで構成された情報が含まれていてもよい。 Further, the third identification information is composed of one or a plurality of combinations in which information indicating access technology (access technology; PLMN Access Technology Identifier) is further associated in addition to the association between PLMN ID and S-NSSAI. Information may be included.
 例えば、第3の識別情報は、SOR(Steering of Roaming)透過コンテナ情報要素(SOR transparent container IE)を拡張した情報要素であってもよいし、allowed NSSAIを拡張した情報であってもよい。ここで、例えば、拡張されたSOR透過コンテナ情報要素は、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素に含まれるpreferred PLMNとアクセス技術の組み合わせリスト(list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)における、PLMN IDとアクセス技術の組み合わせに、更に各PLMNがサポートするNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))が追加された組み合わせであってよい。また、例えば、拡張されたallowed NSSAIは、allowed NSSAIに含まれる複数のS-NSSAIとmapped S-NSSAIの組み合わせに加え、更に、各S-NSSAIがサポートされている1又は複数のPLMN IDが追加された組み合わせで構成され他情報が含まれていてもよい。 For example, the third identification information may be an information element that is an extension of the SOR (Steering of Roaming) transparent container information element (SOR transparent container IE), or may be information that is an extension of allowed NSSAI. Here, for example, the extended SOR transparent container information element is a combination of PLMN ID and access technology in the list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations included in the SOR transparent container information element. In addition, NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) supported by each PLMN may be added to the combination. Also, for example, the extended allowed NSSAI adds one or more PLMN IDs that support each S-NSSAI in addition to the combination of multiple S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI. It may be composed of the above combinations and include other information.
 ここで、UE_A10が第2の識別情報に基づいた、第3の識別情報を認識するための能力情報(capability)が示されていない場合、コアネットワークは当該UE_A10に第3の識別情報を送信せず、拡張されていないSOR transparent container IE又は、拡張されていないallowed S-NSSAIを送信してもよい。 Here, if UE_A10 does not show the ability to recognize the third identification information based on the second identification information, the core network should send the third identification information to the UE_A10. Instead, you may send the unextended SOR transparent container IE or the unextended allowed S-NSSAI.
 第3の識別情報は、コアネットワークがUEに許可したS-NSSAI(例えばallowed S-NSSAI)と、そのS-NSSAIに関連付けられた一又は複数のPLMNのリストにより構成されてもよい。ここで、コアネットワークはPLMNであってもよい。 The third identification information may be composed of an S-NSSAI (for example, allowed S-NSSAI) permitted by the core network to the UE and a list of one or more PLMNs associated with the S-NSSAI. Here, the core network may be PLMN.
 本実施形態における第4の識別情報は、UE_A10が、移動先のネットワークとして使用可能な1又は複数のネットワーク(vPLMN)を識別する情報(PLMN ID)で構成された識別情報であってよい。 The fourth identification information in the present embodiment may be identification information in which UE_A10 is composed of information (PLMN ID) for identifying one or more networks (vPLMN) that can be used as a destination network.
 ここで、第4の識別情報に含まれるPLMN情報(PLMN ID)は、UE_A10がホームネットワーク(home PLMN; hPLMN)において、要求及び/又は許可されたS-NSSAIに基づいて、コアネットワークが選択した1又は複数のPLMN IDであってよい。 Here, the PLMN information (PLMN ID) included in the fourth identification information is selected by the core network based on the S-NSSAI requested and / or permitted by UE_A10 in the home network (home PLMN; hPLMN). It may be one or more PLMN IDs.
 また、更に、第4の識別情報は、PLMN IDとアクセス技術を示す情報(access technology;PLMN Access Technology Identifier)が関連付けられた1又は複数の組み合わせであってもよい。 Further, the fourth identification information may be one or a plurality of combinations in which the PLMN ID and the information indicating the access technology (access technology; PLMN Access Technology Identifier) are associated with each other.
 例えば、第4の識別情報は、SOR transparent container IEであってもよく、当該情報要素には、UE_A10がネットワークに要求及び/又は許可されたNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))をサポートし、コアネットワークによって選択された、1又は複数のPLMN(s)が含まれていてよい。 For example, the fourth identification information may be SOR transparent container IE, and for the information element, UE_A10 supports NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) requested and / or permitted to the network, and the core. It may contain one or more PLMNs (s) selected by the network.
 さらに、第4の識別情報は、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素(SOR transparent container IE)を拡張した情報要素であってもよいし、allowed NSSAIを拡張した情報であってもよい。ここで、例えば、拡張されたSOR透過コンテナ情報要素は、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素に含まれるpreferred PLMNとアクセス技術の組み合わせリスト(list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)における、PLMN IDとアクセス技術の組み合わせに、更に各PLMNがサポートするNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))が追加された組み合わせであってよい。また、例えば、拡張されたallowed NSSAIは、allowed NSSAIに含まれる複数のS-NSSAIとmapped S-NSSAIの組み合わせに加え、更に、各S-NSSAIがサポートされている1又は複数のPLMN IDが追加された組み合わせで構成され他情報が含まれていてもよい。 Furthermore, the fourth identification information may be an information element that is an extension of the SOR transparent container information element (SOR transparent container IE), or may be information that is an extension of allowed NSSAI. Here, for example, the extended SOR transparent container information element is a combination of PLMN ID and access technology in the list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations included in the SOR transparent container information element. In addition, NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) supported by each PLMN may be added to the combination. Also, for example, the extended allowed NSSAI adds one or more PLMN IDs that support each S-NSSAI in addition to the combination of multiple S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI. It may be composed of the above combinations and include other information.
 ここで、UE_A10が第2の識別情報に基づいた、第3の識別情報を認識するための能力情報(capability)が示されていない場合、コアネットワークは当該UE_A10に第3の識別情報を送信せず、PLMNのS-NSSAIサポートを考慮しない従来のSOR transparent container IEを送信してもよい。 Here, if UE_A10 does not show the ability to recognize the third identification information based on the second identification information, the core network should send the third identification information to the UE_A10. Instead, you may send a conventional SOR transparent container IE that does not consider PLMN's S-NSSAI support.
 [3. 第1の実施形態]
 [3.1. 各実施形態で用いられる手続きの説明]
 次に、各実施形態で用いられる手続きについて説明する。尚、各実施形態で用いられる手続きには、登録手続き(Registration procedure)、UE設定更新手続き(Generic UE configuration update procedure)、PLMN選択が含まれる。以下、各手続きについて説明していく。
[3. First Embodiment]
[3.1. Explanation of procedures used in each embodiment]
Next, the procedure used in each embodiment will be described. The procedure used in each embodiment includes a registration procedure (Registration procedure), a UE configuration update procedure (Generic UE configuration update procedure), and PLMN selection. Each procedure will be explained below.
 尚、各実施形態では、図2に記載されているように、HSSとUDM、PCFとPCRF、SMFとPGW-C、UPFとPGW-Uが、それぞれ同一の装置(つまり、同一の物理的なハードウェア、又は同一の論理的なハードウェア、又は同一のソフトウェア)として構成されている場合を例にとって説明する。しかし、本実施形態に記載される内容は、これらが異なる装置(つまり、異なる物理的なハードウェア、又は異なる論理的なハードウェア、又は異なるソフトウェア)として構成される場合にも適用可能である。例えば、これらの間で、直接データの送受信を行ってもよいし、AMF、MME間のN26インターフェースを介してデータを送受信してもよいし、UEを介してデータを送受信してもよい。 In each embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, HSS and UDM, PCF and PCRF, SMF and PGW-C, UPF and PGW-U are the same device (that is, the same physical device). The case where it is configured as hardware, the same logical hardware, or the same software) will be described as an example. However, the content described in this embodiment is also applicable when they are configured as different devices (ie, different physical hardware, or different logical hardware, or different software). For example, data may be transmitted / received directly between them, data may be transmitted / received via the N26 interface between AMF and MME, or data may be transmitted / received via UE.
 [3.2. 登録手続き]
 まず、登録手続き(Registration procedure)について、図6を用いて説明する。以下、本手続きとは登録手続きを指す。登録手続きは、UEが主導してアクセスネットワーク_B、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B、及び/又はDNへ登録する為の手続きである。UEは、ネットワークに登録していない状態であれば、例えば、電源投入時等の任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。言い換えると、UEは、非登録状態(5GMM-DEREGISTERED state)であれば任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始できる。また、各装置(特にUEとAMF)は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録状態(5GMM-REGISTEDED state)に遷移することができる。尚、各登録状態は、アクセス毎に各装置で管理されてよい。具体的には、各装置は3GPPアクセスに対する登録の状態(登録状態又は非登録状態)と、non-3GPPアクセスに対する登録の状態を独立して管理してよい。
[3.2. Registration procedure]
First, the registration procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the registration procedure. The registration procedure is a procedure for the UE to take the initiative in registering with the access network_B and / or the core network_B and / or the DN. The UE can execute this procedure at any time, for example, when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network. In other words, the UE can start this procedure at any time if it is in the unregistered state (5GMM-DEREGISTERED state). In addition, each device (particularly UE and AMF) can transition to the registration state (5GMM-REGISTEDED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure. Each registration state may be managed by each device for each access. Specifically, each device may independently manage the registered status (registered or unregistered status) for 3GPP access and the registered status for non-3GPP access.
 さらに、登録手続きは、ネットワークにおけるUEの位置登録情報を更新する、及び/又は、UEからネットワークへ定期的にUEの状態を通知する、及び/又は、ネットワークにおけるUEに関する特定のパラメータを更新する為の手続きであってもよい。 In addition, the registration procedure is to update the UE location registration information in the network and / or to periodically notify the network of the UE status from the UE and / or to update certain parameters about the UE in the network. It may be the procedure of.
 UEは、TA(トラッキングエリア)を跨ぐモビリティをした際に、登録手続きを開始してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、保持しているTAリスト(TAI list又は登録エリア)で示されるTAとは異なるTAに移動した際に、登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、実行しているバックオフタイマ、またはその他のタイマが満了した際に本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、PDUセッションの切断や無効化が原因で各装置のコンテキストの更新が必要な際に登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEのPDUセッション確立に関する、能力情報、及び/又はプリファレンスに変化が生じた場合、登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、定期的に登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、UE設定更新手続きの完了に基づいて、又は登録手続きの完了に基づいて、又はPDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、又はPDUセッションマネジメント手続きの完了に基づいて、又は各手続きでネットワークから受信した情報に基づいて、又はバックオフタイマの満了、または停止に基づいて、登録手続きを開始してもよい。尚、UEは、これらに限らず、任意のタイミングで登録手続きを実行することができる。 The UE may start the registration procedure when it has mobility across the TA (tracking area). In other words, the UE may start the registration procedure when it moves to a TA different from the TA indicated in the held TA list (TAI list or registration area). In addition, the UE may initiate this procedure when the running backoff timer, or other timer, has expired. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation of the PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process if there is a change in the ability information and / or preferences regarding the establishment of the UE's PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process on a regular basis. In addition, the UE may be based on the completion of the UE configuration update procedure, or on the basis of the completion of the registration procedure, or on the basis of the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, or on the basis of the completion of the PDU session management procedure, or in each procedure. The registration procedure may be initiated based on the information received from the network or based on the expiration or suspension of the backoff timer. The UE is not limited to these, and can execute the registration procedure at any timing.
 なお、上述したUEがネットワークに登録していない状態から登録された状態に遷移する為の手続きを、初期登録手続き(initial registration procedure)または初期登録のための登録手続き(registration procedure for initial registration)としてよいし、UEがネットワークに登録された状態で実行された登録手続きを、移動及び定期的な登録更新の為の登録手続き(registration procedure for mobility and periodic registration update)または移動及び定期的な登録手続き(mobility and periodic registration procedure)としてよい。 The procedure for transitioning from the state in which the UE is not registered in the network to the state in which it is registered is defined as an initial registration procedure or a registration procedure for initial registration. Well, the registration procedure executed while the UE is registered in the network can be changed to the registration procedure (registration procedure for mobility and periodic registration update) or the transfer and regular registration procedure (registration procedure for mobility and periodic registration update). Mobility and periodic registration procedure) may be used.
 なお、UEは登録手続きの前、又は登録手続きの初期状態において、PLMN選択を実行し、UEが要求するPLMNを選択及び決定してもよい。 The UE may execute the PLMN selection before the registration procedure or in the initial state of the registration procedure, and select and determine the PLMN required by the UE.
 図6のnew AMF141は、本手続きによりUE_A10が登録されるAMFを示し、old AMF142は本手続きより前の手続きによりUEが登録されていたAMFを意味する。本手続き内で、AMFの変更が発生しない場合、old AMF142とnew AMF141間のインターフェース、及びold AMF142とnew AMF141間の手続きは発生せず、new AMF141はold AMF142と同じ装置であってよい。本実施形態では、AMFと記載した場合、new AMF141を意味してもよいし、old AMF142を意味してもよいし、またその両方を意味してもよい。なお、new AMF141とold AMF142はAMF140であってよい。 The new AMF141 in Fig. 6 indicates the AMF in which UE_A10 was registered by this procedure, and the old AMF142 means the AMF in which the UE was registered by the procedure prior to this procedure. If no change in AMF occurs in this procedure, the interface between old AMF142 and new AMF141 and the procedure between old AMF142 and new AMF141 do not occur, and new AMF141 may be the same device as old AMF142. In the present embodiment, when AMF is described, it may mean new AMF141, old AMF142, or both. Note that new AMF141 and old AMF142 may be AMF140.
 まず、UE_A10は、new AMF141に登録要求(Registration request)メッセージを送信することにより(S600)(S602)(S604)、登録手続きを開始する。具体的には、UEは、登録要求メッセージを含むRRCメッセージを、5G AN120(又はgNB)に送信する(S600)。尚、登録要求メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージである。また、RRCメッセージは、UEと5G AN120(又はgNB)との間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。また、NASメッセージはNASレイヤで処理され、RRCメッセージはRRCレイヤで処理される。尚、NASレイヤはRRCレイヤよりも上位のレイヤである。 First, UE_A10 starts the registration procedure by sending a registration request message to new AMF141 (S600) (S602) (S604). Specifically, the UE sends an RRC message including a registration request message to 5G AN120 (or gNB) (S600). The registration request message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface. The RRC message may be a control message sent and received between the UE and 5G AN120 (or gNB). In addition, NAS messages are processed at the NAS layer, and RRC messages are processed at the RRC layer. The NAS layer is a higher layer than the RRC layer.
 ここで、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報を、登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信する事ができる。さらに、UE_A10は登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに、本手続きの種類を示す識別情報を含めて送信してよい。ここで、本手続きの種類を示す識別情報は、5GS registration type IEであってよく、本手続きが初期登録の為、又は移動に伴う登録情報更新の為、又は定期的な登録情報更新の為、又は緊急時の登録の為、の登録手続きであることを示す情報であってよい。 Here, UE_A10 can send the first identification information by including it in the registration request message and / or the RRC message. In addition, UE_A10 may send the registration request message and / or the RRC message with identification information indicating the type of this procedure. Here, the identification information indicating the type of this procedure may be 5GS registration type IE, and this procedure is for initial registration, for updating registration information due to movement, or for periodical update of registration information. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that the registration procedure is for emergency registration.
 UE_A10は、UE_A10がサポートする機能をネットワークに通知するために、UEの能力情報を登録要求メッセージ含めてもよく、UEの能力情報として第1の識別情報を含めてもよい。ここで、UEの能力情報は、5GSの5G MM capabilityであってよい。 UE_A10 may include the UE ability information in the registration request message in order to notify the network of the functions supported by the UE_A10, or may include the first identification information as the UE ability information. Here, the capability information of the UE may be 5G MM capability of 5GS.
 UE_A10はこの識別情報を、これらとは異なる制御メッセージ、例えば、RRCレイヤよりも下位のレイヤ(例えば、MACレイヤ、RLCレイヤ、PDCPレイヤ)の制御メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。尚、UE_A10は、これらの識別情報を、送信することで、UE_A10が各機能をサポートしていることを示してもよいし、UEの要求を示してもよいし、これら両方を示してもよい。尚、各機能のサポートを示す情報と、各機能の使用の要求を示す情報は、同じ識別情報として送受信されてもよいし、異なる識別情報として送受信されてもよい。 UE_A10 may send this identification information by including it in a control message different from these, for example, a control message of a layer lower than the RRC layer (for example, MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer). Note that UE_A10 may indicate that UE_A10 supports each function by transmitting these identification information, may indicate a request of the UE, or may indicate both of them. .. The information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received as the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
 尚、UE_A10は、第1の識別情報をネットワークに送信するか否かを、UEの能力情報、及び/又はUEポリシー、及び/又はUEの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はUEが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、選択、決定してもよい。 In addition, UE_A10 determines whether or not to transmit the first identification information to the network, the ability information of the UE and / or the UE policy, and / or the state of the UE, and / or the registration information of the user, and / or the UE. It may be selected and decided based on the context held by.
 UE_A10は、移動後のPLMN選択に使用する、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に含まれる、PLMN IDとPLMNがサポートするNSSAI(S-NSSAI)の組み合わせ情報を識別し、処理するための機能を備える場合、第1の識別情報を登録要求メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。UE_A10は、第1の識別情報を送信することで、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に含まれる、PLMN IDとPLMNがサポートするNSSAI(S-NSSAI)の組み合わせ情報を処理するための機能を備えることをネットワークに示してもよい。 UE_A10 identifies and processes the combination information of PLMN ID and NSSAI (S-NSSAI) supported by PLMN contained in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information used for PLMN selection after movement. The first identification information may be included in the registration request message and transmitted when the function for the above is provided. By transmitting the first identification information, UE_A10 processes the combination information of PLMN ID and NSSAI (S-NSSAI) supported by PLMN contained in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. It may be shown to the network that it has a function for the purpose.
 更にUE_A10は、第1の識別情報を登録要求メッセージに含めて送信することで、第1の識別情報に対応する機能をネットワークがサポートすることを示すネットワークの能力情報を要求することを示してよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10 may indicate that the first identification information is included in the registration request message and transmitted to request the network capability information indicating that the network supports the function corresponding to the first identification information. ..
 また、UE_A10が第1の識別情報が示す機能をサポートする能力を保持し、更に、UE_A10が、本手続きによって登録を実施しているPLMN(HPLMN)において使用を要求するNSSAI(requested NSSAI)に含まれる1又は複数のS-NSSAIをUEのモビリティが発生した後に登録し接続するVPLMN又はEHPMNにおいて使用することが想定し、要求する場合に第1の識別情報を登録要求メッセーに含めてもネットワークに送信してもよい。 In addition, UE_A10 retains the ability to support the function indicated by the first identification information, and UE_A10 is included in the NSSAI (requested NSSAI) requested to be used in the PLMN (HPLMN) registered by this procedure. It is assumed that one or more S-NSSAI will be used in VPLMN or EHPMN to register and connect after UE mobility occurs, and even if the first identification information is included in the registration request message when requested, it will be added to the network. You may send it.
 UE_A10は、登録要求メッセージ及び/又は登録要求メッセージが含まれるRRCメッセージに、第1の識別情報以外も含めてもよく、例えばUE ID及び/又はPLMN ID及び/又はAMF識別情報及び/又はrequested NSSAIを含めて送信してもよい。 UE_A10 may include other than the first identification information in the registration request message and / or the RRC message including the registration request message, for example, UEID and / or PLMNID and / or AMF identification information and / or requested NSSAI. May be included in the transmission.
 ここで、AMF識別情報とは、AMF、またはAMFの集合を識別する情報であってよく、例えば、5G-S-TMSI(5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier)やGUAMI(Globally Unique AMF Identifier)であってよい。 Here, the AMF identification information may be information for identifying AMF or a set of AMF, for example, 5G-S-TMSI (5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier) or GUAMI (Globally Unique AMF Identifier). You can.
 UE_A10が、「UEが要求するPLMNと、UEが要求するアクセスタイプと、に対応づけられた、allowed NSSAI」を記憶する場合、及び/又は「要求するPLMNに対してconfigured NSSAI」を記憶する場合、及び/又は「default configured NSSAI」を記憶する場合、UEはrequested NSSAIを登録要求メッセージに含めて、要求するPLMNへ送信してもよい。 When UE_A10 stores "allowed NSSAI associated with the PLMN requested by the UE and the access type requested by the UE" and / or when "configured NSSAI for the requested PLMN" is stored. , And / or when storing the "default configured NSSAI", the UE may include the requested NSSAI in the registration request message and send it to the requesting PLMN.
 または、「UEが要求するPLMNとは異なるPLMNと、UEが要求するアクセスタイプと、に対応付けられたallowed NSSAI」をUEが記憶する場合、そのallowed NSSAIまたはそのallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIが、更に、要求するPLMNと関連付けられている場合には、UE_A10はrequested NSSAIを登録要求メッセージに含めて、要求するPLMNへ送信してもよい。 Or, when the UE remembers "the allowed NSSAI associated with the PLMN different from the PLMN requested by the UE and the access type requested by the UE", the allowed NSSAI or the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI. However, if it is further associated with the requesting PLMN, UE_A10 may include the requested NSSAI in the registration request message and send it to the requesting PLMN.
 ここで、UEが要求するPLMNとは異なるPLMNと関連付けられたallowed NSSAIまたはそのallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIが、要求するPLMNと関連付けられている場合とは、例えば、UE_A10がallowed NSSAIを複数のPLMN(要求するPLMNとその他のPLMN)と関連付けて記憶することを意味してもよい。 Here, when the allowed NSSAI associated with the PLMN different from the PLMN requested by the UE or the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI is associated with the requested PLMN, for example, UE_A10 has a plurality of allowed NSSAIs. It may mean that it is stored in association with the PLMN (requested PLMN and other PLMN).
 または、UEが要求するPLMNとは異なるPLMNと関連付けられたallowed NSSAIまたはそのallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIが、要求するPLMNと関連付けられている場合とは、UEが要求するPLMNとは異なるPLMNと関連付けられたallowed NSSAIまたはそのallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIと、そのS-NSSAIをサポートするPLMN listをUEが記憶する場合に、そのPLMN listにUEが要求するPLMNが含まれている場合であってもよい。 Alternatively, if the allowed NSSAI associated with a PLMN different from the PLMN requested by the UE or the S-NSSAI contained in the allowed NSSAI is associated with the PLMN requested, the PLMN is different from the PLMN required by the UE. When the UE stores the allowed NSSAI associated with or the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI and the PLMN list that supports the S-NSSAI, and the PLMN list contains the PLMN required by the UE. It may be.
 また、UE_A10は、UEが要求するPLMNとは異なるPLMNと関連付けられたallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIをrequested NSSAIに含めてもよい。 In addition, UE_A10 may include the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI associated with the PLMN different from the PLMN requested by the UE in the requested NSSAI.
 または、UE_A10は、UEが要求するPLMNとは異なるPLMNと関連付けられたallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIのmapped S-NSSAIを5GSのRequested mapped NSSAIに含めてもよい。 Alternatively, UE_A10 may include the mapped S-NSSAI of S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI associated with the PLMN different from the PLMN requested by the UE in the Requested mapped NSSAI of 5GS.
 または、UE_A10は、VPLMNに対する登録要求手続きにおいて、HPLMNと関連付けられたallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを、5GSのRequested mapped NSSAIに含めて、ネットワークに送信してもよい。 Alternatively, UE_A10 may include the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI associated with the HPLMN in the 5GS Requested mapped NSSAI and send it to the network in the registration request procedure for the VPLMN.
 また、UE_A10は、登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を含めて送信することで、又は登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を送信することで、登録手続き中にPDUセッション確立手続きを開始してもよい。 In addition, UE_A10 can be sent by including the SM message (for example, PDU session establishment request message) in the registration request message, or by sending the SM message (for example, PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message. The PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
 5G AN120(又はgNB)は、登録要求メッセージを含むRRCメッセージを受信すると、登録要求メッセージを転送するAMFを選択する(S602)。尚、5G AN120(又はgNB)は、登録要求メッセージ、及び/又は登録要求メッセージが含まれるRRCメッセージ、に含まれる1又は複数の識別情報に基づいて、AMFを選択することができる。具体的には、5G AN(又はgNB)は、第1識別情報に基づいて、登録要求メッセージの送信先のnew AMF141を選択してもよい。 When 5G AN120 (or gNB) receives an RRC message including a registration request message, it selects the AMF to which the registration request message is transferred (S602). The 5G AN120 (or gNB) can select AMF based on one or more identification information contained in the registration request message and / or the RRC message including the registration request message. Specifically, 5GAN (or gNB) may select new AMF141 to which the registration request message is sent based on the first identification information.
 例えば、5G AN120(又はgNB)は、第1の識別情報に基づき、第1の識別情報が示す能力情報に対応する機能をサポートするAMFを選択してもよい。具体的には、5G AN(又はgNB)は、第1の識別情報が示す、UEの能力情報に対応し、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に含まれる、PLMN ID及び/又はPLMNのアクセス技術とPLMNがサポートするNSSAI(S-NSSAI)の組み合わせた情報を生成し送信するための機能を備えるAMFを選択してもよい。 For example, 5G AN120 (or gNB) may select an AMF that supports a function corresponding to the ability information indicated by the first identification information based on the first identification information. Specifically, the 5GAN (or gNB) corresponds to the UE capability information indicated by the first identification information, and is included in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information, PLMNID and /. Alternatively, an AMF having a function for generating and transmitting information combining PLMN's access technology and PLMN-supported NSSAI (S-NSSAI) may be selected.
 なお、AMFの選択方法はこれに限らず、5G AN(又はgNB)はこれ以外の条件に基づきAMFを選択してもよい。5G AN(又はgNB)は、受信したRRCメッセージから登録要求メッセージを取り出し、選択したnew AMFに、登録要求メッセージを転送する(S604)。なお、第1の識別情報が、登録要求メッセージには含まれずRRCメッセージに含まれた場合、RRCメッセージに含まれた識別情報を、選択したAMF(new AMF141)に、登録要求メッセージとともに転送してもよい(S604)。 The selection method of AMF is not limited to this, and 5GAN (or gNB) may select AMF based on other conditions. 5GAN (or gNB) extracts the registration request message from the received RRC message and forwards the registration request message to the selected new AMF (S604). If the first identification information is not included in the registration request message but is included in the RRC message, the identification information included in the RRC message is transferred to the selected AMF (new AMF141) together with the registration request message. May be good (S604).
 new AMF141は、登録要求メッセージを受信した場合、第1の条件判別を実行することができる。第1の条件判別とは、ネットワーク(又はnew AMF141)がUEの要求を受諾するか否かを判別するためのものである。new AMF141は、第1の条件判別が真の場合、S606からS612 の手続きを実行する。一方で、new AMF141は、第1の条件判別が偽の場合、S606からS608の手続きを実行せず、S610の手続きを実行してもよい。 When the new AMF141 receives the registration request message, it can execute the first condition determination. The first conditional determination is for determining whether or not the network (or new AMF141) accepts the UE request. new AMF141 executes the procedure from S606 to S612 when the first condition determination is true. On the other hand, new AMF141 may execute the procedure of S610 without executing the procedure of S606 to S608 when the first condition determination is false.
 または、new AMF141は、UEコンテキストをold AMF142に要求、及びUEコンテキストをold AMF142から受信(S606、S608)後に第1の条件判別をしてもよい。その場合、new AMF141は、第1の条件判別が真の場合、S610及び/又はS612を実行してよい。一方で、new AMF141は、第1の条件判別が偽の場合、S610を実行してもよい。 Alternatively, the new AMF141 may request the UE context from the old AMF142 and determine the first condition after receiving the UE context from the old AMF142 (S606, S608). In that case, new AMF141 may execute S610 and / or S612 if the first condition determination is true. On the other hand, new AMF141 may execute S610 when the first condition determination is false.
 なお、ここで、第1の条件判別が真の場合、S610で送信及び受信される制御メッセージは、登録受諾(Registration accept)メッセージであってよいし、第1の条件判別が偽である場合、S610で送信及び受信される制御メッセージは、登録拒絶(Registration reject)メッセージであってよい。 Here, when the first condition determination is true, the control message transmitted and received by the S610 may be a registration acceptance message, and when the first condition determination is false, the control message may be a registration acceptance message. The control message transmitted and received by the S610 may be a Registration reject message.
 尚、第1の条件判別は、登録要求メッセージの受信、及び/又は登録要求メッセージに含まれる各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、実行されてもよい。 The first condition determination is the reception of the registration request message and / or each identification information contained in the registration request message, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy, and It may be executed based on / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by AMF.
 例えば、UEの要求をネットワークが許可する場合、第1の条件判別は真であり、UEの要求をネットワークが許可しない場合、第1の条件判別は偽でよい。また、UEの登録先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、UEの要求する機能をサポートしている場合、第1の条件判別は真であり、UEの要求する機能をサポートしていない場合、第1の条件判別は偽でよい。さらに、送受信される識別情報が許可される場合、第1の条件判別は真であり、送受信される識別情報が許可されない場合、第1の条件判別は偽でよい。 For example, if the network permits the UE request, the first condition determination is true, and if the network does not allow the UE request, the first condition determination may be false. Also, if the network to which the UE is registered and / or the devices in the network support the functions required by the UE, the first condition determination is true and does not support the functions required by the UE. In this case, the first condition determination may be false. Further, if the transmitted / received identification information is permitted, the first conditional determination may be true, and if the transmitted / received identification information is not permitted, the first conditional determination may be false.
 また、AMFがUEから受信したrequested NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIがNSSAA手続きを要するスライスを識別する情報である場合、更にAMFがUEに対して対応するS-NSSAIのNSSAA手続きの結果が成功であると記憶する場合、第1の条件判別は真であってよい。または、UEに許可するS-NSSAIがなく、今後もUEに対してallowed NSSAIを割り当てる予定がない場合、第1の条件判別は偽であってもよい。 Also, if the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI received by the AMF is the information that identifies the slice that requires the NSSAA procedure, the result of the NSSAA procedure of the S-NSSAI that the AMF corresponds to the UE is successful. The first condition determination may be true if it is remembered to be. Alternatively, if there is no S-NSSAI allowed for the UE and there is no plan to assign allowed NSSAI to the UE in the future, the first condition determination may be false.
 また、AMFがUEから受信したrequested NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIがスライスに接続する最大UE数管理を要するスライスを識別する情報である場合、さらに最大UE数に達していなかった場合、第1の条件判別は真であってよい。または、UEに許可するS-NSSAIがない場合も、今後もUEに対してallowed NSSAIを割り当てることが期待できる場合には、第1の条件判別は真であってもよい。 Also, if the S-NSSAI included in the requested NSSAI received from the UE by AMF is the information that identifies the slice that requires management of the maximum number of UEs to connect to the slice, and if the maximum number of UEs has not been reached, the first The condition determination may be true. Alternatively, even if there is no S-NSSAI allowed for the UE, the first condition determination may be true if it can be expected that the allowed NSSAI will be assigned to the UE in the future.
 AMFは、UEに許可するS-NSSAIがない場合で、第1のNSSAIをUEに割り当てる場合に、第1の条件判別は真であってよいし、偽であってもよい。 In AMF, when there is no S-NSSAI allowed in the UE and the first NSSAI is assigned to the UE, the first condition determination may be true or false.
 new AMF141は、new AMF141がUEから受信したメッセージに含まれるAMF識別情報に示されるAMFがold AMF142である場合、S606、S608の手続きを実行し、new AMF141がUE_A10から受信したメッセージに含まれるAMF識別情報に示されるAMFがnew AMF141である場合、S606、S608の手続きを実行しない。言い換えると、本手続きによりAMFの変更(AMF change)が発生した場合、S606、S608の手続きは実行され、AMFの変更が発生しない場合は、S606、S608の手続きはスキップされる。 If the AMF indicated in the AMF identification information included in the message received from the UE by the new AMF141 is the old AMF142, the new AMF141 executes the procedures of S606 and S608, and the new AMF141 is included in the message received from the UE_A10. If the AMF shown in the identification information is new AMF141, the procedure of S606 and S608 is not executed. In other words, if an AMF change occurs due to this procedure, the procedures for S606 and S608 will be executed, and if no change for AMF occurs, the procedures for S606 and S608 will be skipped.
 UEコンテキストの転送手続き(S606、S608)について説明する。new AMF141は、old AMF142にUEコンテキストの要求メッセージを送信する(S606)。old AMF142は受信したUEコンテキストの要求メッセージに基づき、new AMF141へUEコンテキストを送信する。new AMF141は、受信したUEコンテキストに基づき、UEコンテキストを生成する。 The UE context transfer procedure (S606, S608) will be explained. new AMF141 sends a UE context request message to old AMF142 (S606). The old AMF142 sends the UE context to the new AMF141 based on the received UE context request message. new AMF141 creates a UE context based on the received UE context.
 ここで、new AMF141からold AMF142に送信されるUEコンテキストには、UE IDやallowed NSSAIが含まれていてもよい。更に、UEコンテキストには、configured NSSAI及び/又はrejected NSSAI、NSSAI及び/又はpending NSSAI、及び/又は第1のNSSAI、が含まれていてもよい。また、UEコンテキストに含まれるallowed NSSAI、及び/又はconfigured NSSAI、及び/又はrejected NSSAI、及び/又はpending NSSAI、及び/又は第1のNSSAI、及び各NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAI、はUEへの通知が完了しているか否かの情報が紐づけられていてもよい。 Here, the UE context sent from new AMF141 to old AMF142 may include UEID and allowed NSSAI. Further, the UE context may include configured NSSAI and / or rejected NSSAI, NSSAI and / or pending NSSAI, and / or a first NSSAI. Also, allowed NSSAI and / or configured NSSAI and / or rejected NSSAI and / or pending NSSAI and / or first NSSAI included in the UE context, and S-NSSAI included in each NSSAI are to the UE. Information on whether or not the notification has been completed may be linked.
 また、UEコンテキストには、NSSAA手続きを要するS-NSSAIの情報、及び/又はUEに対してNSSAA手続きを完了した、認証が成功したことを示す情報、及び/又は認証が失敗した事を示す情報を含めてもよい。 Also, in the UE context, information on S-NSSAI that requires NSSAA procedure, and / or information indicating that the NSSAA procedure has been completed for the UE, that authentication has succeeded, and / or that authentication has failed. May be included.
 また、UEコンテキストには、スライスに接続する最大UE数管理を要するS-NSSAIの情報、及び/又は最大UE数に達したことを示す情報、及び/又はスライスに接続する最大UE数に達したか否かを示す情報を含めてもよい。 Also, in the UE context, the information of S-NSSAI that requires management of the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice, and / or the information indicating that the maximum number of UEs has been reached, and / or the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice have been reached. Information indicating whether or not it may be included.
 なお、これらS-NSSAIの特性に関する情報は、1つの情報として管理されてよく、具体的には、ネットワークは、各S-NSSAIごとに、NSSAAを要するか否か、NSSAAが成功したか否か、スライスに接続する最大UE数の管理を要するか否か、スライスに接続する最大UE数に達したか否か、を示す情報を関連付けて記憶してもよい。 Information on the characteristics of these S-NSSAIs may be managed as one piece of information. Specifically, whether or not the network requires NSSAA for each S-NSSAI and whether or not NSSAA is successful. , Information indicating whether or not the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice needs to be managed and whether or not the maximum number of UEs connected to the slice has been reached may be stored in association with each other.
 new AMF141は、第1の条件判別の決定に基づいて、及び/又はold AMF142からUEコンテキストの受信に基づき、UEへ制御メッセージを送信してよい(S610)。制御メッセージは登録受諾メッセージであってもよいし、登録拒絶メッセージであってもよい。以下、UEに送信された制御メッセージが登録受諾メッセージであった場合について説明する。 The new AMF141 may send a control message to the UE based on the determination of the first condition determination and / or based on the reception of the UE context from the old AMF142 (S610). The control message may be a registration acceptance message or a registration refusal message. The case where the control message sent to the UE is the registration acceptance message will be described below.
 new AMF141は、制御メッセージに少なくとも第2から4の識別情報の内、1つ以上の識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。尚、new AMF141は、これらの識別情報及び/又は制御メッセージを送信することで、ネットワークが各機能をサポートしていることを示してもよいし、UEの要求が受諾されたことを示してもよいし、UEからの要求を許可又はサポートしていない事を示してもよいし、これらを組み合わせた情報を示してもよい。さらに、複数の識別情報が送受信される場合、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。尚、各機能のサポートを示す情報と、各機能の使用の要求を示す情報は、同じ識別情報として送受信されてもよいし、異なる識別情報として送受信されてもよい。 The new AMF141 may send the control message including at least one or more identification information out of the second to fourth identification information. Note that the new AMF141 may indicate that the network supports each function by transmitting these identification information and / or control messages, or may indicate that the UE request has been accepted. It may indicate that it does not allow or support the request from the UE, or it may indicate information that combines these. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information. The information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received as the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
 ここで、第2の識別情報は、UEから受信した第1の識別情報が示す能力情報に対応する機能をnew AMF141及び/又はコアネットワークがサポートしていることを示す能力情報であってよい。 Here, the second identification information may be the ability information indicating that the new AMF141 and / or the core network supports the function corresponding to the ability information indicated by the first identification information received from the UE.
 new AMF141は、また、第3及び/又は第4の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めることで、第2の識別情報が示す能力をnew AMF141及び/又はコアネットワークが有していることを示してもよい。言い換えると、new AMF141は、第3及び/又は4の識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含める場合、第2の識別情報を含めなくてもよい。 The new AMF141 also indicates that the new AMF141 and / or the core network has the capabilities indicated by the second identification by including the third and / or fourth identification in the registration acceptance message. May be good. In other words, new AMF141 does not have to include the second identification information if it includes the third and / or 4 identification information in the registration acceptance message.
 更に、new AMF141は、UEから第1の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、第3及び/又は第4の識別情報を送信してはならない。言い換えると、new AMF141は、UEから第1の識別情報を受信しなかった場合、第3及び/又は第4の識別情報が禁止されてもよい。 Furthermore, new AMF141 must not transmit the 3rd and / or 4th identification information if it does not receive the 1st identification information from the UE. In other words, if the new AMF141 does not receive the first identification information from the UE, the third and / or fourth identification information may be prohibited.
 new AMF141は、UEから第1の識別情報を受信した場合、第2から4の識別情報のうち、少なくとも1つの識別情報を制御メッセージに含めて送信してよい。 When the new AMF141 receives the first identification information from the UE, it may send at least one of the second to fourth identification information by including it in the control message.
 更に、new AMF141は、UEの設定情報の更新があった場合に、第3の識別情報及び/又は4の識別情報の内少なくとも1つを送信してよい。 Further, the new AMF141 may transmit at least one of the third identification information and / or the identification information of 4 when the setting information of the UE is updated.
 new AMF141は、さらに、configured NSSAI、及び/又はallowed NSSAI、及び/又はrejected NSSAI、及び/又はpending NSSAI、及び/又は第1のNSSAIを制御メッセージに含めてUE_A10へ送信してよい。 The new AMF141 may further include the configured NSSAI and / or allowed NSSAI, and / or rejected NSSAI, and / or pending NSSAI, and / or the first NSSAI in the control message and transmit it to UE_A10.
 new AMF141は、制御メッセージの送信時に、UEに許可するS-NSSAI(allowed NSSAI)はないが、本手続き完了後または本手続きと並行して、NSSAA手続きを実行する予定がある場合、またはUEとネットワーク間でNSSAA手続きを実行中である場合、またはpending NSSAIを制御メッセージに含めて送信した場合、空の値をallowed NSSAIに含めて送信してもよい。 new AMF141 does not allow S-NSSAI (allowed NSSAI) to the UE when sending a control message, but if there is a plan to execute the NSSAA procedure after the completion of this procedure or in parallel with this procedure, or with the UE If the NSSAA procedure is being executed between networks, or if the pending NSSAI is included in the control message and sent, an empty value may be included in the allowed NSSAI and sent.
 new AMF141は、制御メッセージの送信時に、UEに許可するS-NSSAI(allowed NSSAI)はないが、第10の識別情報を制御メッセージに含める場合、また本手続きより前に第1のNSSAIをUEへ通知している場合には、空の値をallowed NSSAIに含めて送信してもよい。 new AMF141 does not allow S-NSSAI (allowed NSSAI) to UE when sending a control message, but when including the 10th identification information in the control message, and before this procedure, the 1st NSSAI is sent to UE. If notified, an empty value may be included in allowed NSSAI and sent.
 new AMF141は、全てのPLMNに適用されることを示す、第13の識別情報を制御メッセージに含める場合、第15の識別情報をともに制御メッセージに含めてもよい。 When the 13th identification information indicating that the new AMF141 is applied to all PLMNs is included in the control message, the 15th identification information may be included in the control message together.
 UE_A10は、制御メッセージ、及び/又は第10から15の識別情報の内の1つ以上の情報を、ネットワークから受信する。より詳細には、UEは、制御メッセージ、及び/又は第10から15の識別情報の内の1つ以上の情報を、new AMF141から受信する。 UE_A10 receives a control message and / or one or more of the 10th to 15th identification information from the network. More specifically, the UE receives a control message and / or one or more of the 10th to 15th identification information from new AMF141.
 UE_A10は、第10から15の識別情報のうち、少なくとも1つの情報の受信に基づき、受信した情報を認識してよい。具体的には、UE_A10は、スライス毎に接続する最大UE数に達したために、第10の識別情報で示されるS-NSSAI、及び/又は第14の識別情報で示されるS-NSSAI、及び/又は第15の識別情報で示されるmapped S-NSSAIに関係するS-NSSAIを用いたMMメッセージの送信、及び/又はSMメッセージの送信一時的に禁止されている状態であることを認識してよい。なお、ここでMM手続きは登録要求メッセージであってもよいし、SMメッセージはPDUセッション確立要求メッセージであってもよい。 UE_A10 may recognize the received information based on the reception of at least one of the 10th to 15th identification information. Specifically, UE_A10 has reached the maximum number of UEs to be connected per slice, so that S-NSSAI indicated by the tenth identification information and / or S-NSSAI indicated by the fourteenth identification information, and / Alternatively, it may be recognized that the transmission of the MM message using the S-NSSAI related to the mapped S-NSSAI indicated by the fifteenth identification information and / or the transmission of the SM message is temporarily prohibited. .. Here, the MM procedure may be a registration request message, and the SM message may be a PDU session establishment request message.
 UE_A10は、第2から4の識別情報のうち少なくとも1つ以上の情報の受信、及び/又は制御メッセージの受信に基づいて、以下の作業を実行してよい。 UE_A10 may perform the following operations based on the reception of at least one or more of the identification information 2 to 4 and / or the reception of the control message.
 UE_A10は、第2から第4の識別情報の内、1以上の識別情報を受信することで、ネットワークが、第1の識別情報が示すUE能力情報に対応する機能をサポートしていることを認識してもよい。 UE_A10 recognizes that by receiving one or more of the second to fourth identification information, the network supports the function corresponding to the UE capability information indicated by the first identification information. You may.
 UE_A10は、第2の識別情報を受信せずに、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を受信した場合には、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を拡張されていないSOR透過コンテナ情報要素または、拡張されていないallowed NSSAIとして認識、記憶、処理してよい。 When UE_A10 receives the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information without receiving the second identification information, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is extended. It may be recognized, stored, and processed as an unextended SOR transparent container information element or an unextended allowed NSSAI.
 UE_A10は、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を受信した場合、UE_A10は、これらを記憶又は更新してよい。例えば、本手続きが、初期登録手続きであった場合、又は、UEが第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を記憶又は保持していない場合、これらを記憶してもよい。また、例えば、本手続きが、更新のための登録手続きであった場合、又は、UEが第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に含まれる情報を既に受信又はプリコンフィグ等によって記憶又は保持している場合は、本手続きによって新たに受信した第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報によって上書き又は追加することで更新してもよい。 When UE_A10 receives the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information, UE_A10 may store or update these. For example, if this procedure is an initial registration procedure, or if the UE does not store or retain the third and / or fourth identification information, they may be stored. Also, for example, if this procedure is a registration procedure for renewal, or the UE has already received or stored or preconfigured the information contained in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. If it is retained, it may be updated by overwriting or adding it with the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information newly received by this procedure.
 具体的には、第3の識別情報が拡張されたSOR透過コンテナ情報要素である場合、UE_A10は、第3の識別情報の受信に基づき、第3の識別情報に示される一又は複数の情報を記憶する。更に、すでに、UE_A10が拡張されたSOR透過コンテナ情報要素または拡張されていないSOR透過コンテナ情報要素を記憶している場合、古いSOR透過コンテナ情報要素を削除してもよい。 Specifically, when the third identification information is an extended SOR transparent container information element, UE_A10 obtains one or more pieces of information shown in the third identification information based on the reception of the third identification information. Remember. Furthermore, if UE_A10 already remembers the extended SOR transparent container information element or the unextended SOR transparent container information element, the old SOR transparent container information element may be deleted.
 または、第3の識別情報が拡張されたallowed NSSAIである場合、UE_A10は、第3の識別情報の受信に基づき、第3の識別情報に示される一又は複数の情報を記憶する。具体的には、UE_A10は、第3の識別情報の受信に基づき、allowed NSSAIを更新してよい。更に、すでに、UE_A10がallowed NSSAIを記憶している場合、古いallowed NSSAIを削除してもよい。 Alternatively, if the third identification information is an extended allowed NSSAI, UE_A10 stores one or more pieces of information shown in the third identification information based on the reception of the third identification information. Specifically, UE_A10 may update allowed NSSAI based on the reception of the third identification information. Furthermore, if UE_A10 already remembers allowed NSSAI, the old allowed NSSAI may be deleted.
 更に具体的には、第3の識別情報が拡張されたallowed NSSAIである場合、UE_A10は、第3の識別情報の受信に基づき、第3の識別情報に示されるallowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIを、現在のPLMNとアクセスタイプに対応づけて記憶してよい。さらに、UE_A10は、allowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIに、サポートするPLMNリストを関連付けて記憶してもよい。 More specifically, when the third identification information is an extended allowed NSSAI, UE_A10 is the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI shown in the third identification information based on the reception of the third identification information. May be stored in association with the current PLMN and access type. Further, UE_A10 may store the S-NSSAI included in the allowed NSSAI in association with the supported PLMN list.
 第4の識別情報が、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素である場合、UE_A10は、第4の識別情報の受信に基づき、受信したSOR透過コンテナ情報要素を記憶してもよい。 第4の識別情報が、allowed NSSAIである場合、UE_A10は、第4の識別情報の受信に基づき、受信したallowed NSSAIを記憶してもよい。 When the fourth identification information is the SOR transparent container information element, UE_A10 may store the received SOR transparent container information element based on the reception of the fourth identification information. When the fourth identification information is allowed NSSAI, UE_A10 may store the received allowed NSSAI based on the reception of the fourth identification information.
 ここで、例えば、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報は、第1の識別情報をUEから受信したAMF又はUDM又はSOR-AF又はその他のコアネットワーク装置が、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素に基づいて、UEが許可されたNSSAI(allowed NSSAI)に含まれるS-NSSAI(s)をサポートするPLMN毎に関連付けを行うことで生成した新たな情報であってもよいし、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素を拡張又は変更して生成された情報であってもよい。この関連付けは、具体的には、SOR透過コンテナ情報要素に含まれるPLMN ID and access technology list (list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)に記録されるPLMN ID とaccess技術の関連付けに加え、更にPLMN ID毎にサポートされるallowed NSSAI又はallowed NSSAIに含まれる1以上のS-NSSAIが関連付けられ、PLMN IDとaccess技術とUEが許可された1以上のNSSAIを1組の情報としたSOR透過コンテナ情報要素又はPLMN ID and access technology list (list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)を拡張したリストとして構成されてよい。 Here, for example, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is the SOR transparent container information element of the AMF or UDM or SOR-AF or other core network device that received the first identification information from the UE. Based on, the UE may be new information generated by associating each PLMN that supports S-NSSAI (s) included in the permitted NSSAI (allowed NSSAI), or SOR transparent container information. The information may be generated by expanding or changing the element. Specifically, this association is made in addition to the association between the PLMN ID recorded in the PLMN ID and access technology list (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations) included in the SOR transparent container information element, and the PLMN ID. A SOR transparent container information element that has one or more S-NSSAIs included in the allowed NSSAI or allowed NSSAI that are supported for each, and one or more NSSAIs that are allowed PLMN ID, access technology, and UE as a set of information. Alternatively, it may be configured as an extended list of PLMN ID and access technology lists (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations).
 また、例えば、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報は、第1の識別情報をUEから受信したAMF又はUDM又はその他のコアネットワーク装置が、allowed NSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAI毎に、S-NSSAIをサポートする1又は複数のVPLMNのPLMN IDとの関連付けを行って生成した新たな情報であってもよいし、allowed NSSAIを拡張又は変更して生成された情報であってもよい。具体的には、S-NSSAIとmapped S-NSSAIの関連付けに加え、更にこれらのS-NSSAIをサポートするPLMN IDを1組の情報としたallowed NSSAIを拡張したリストとして構成されてよい。 Further, for example, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is for each S-NSSAI in which the AMF or UDM or other core network device that has received the first identification information from the UE is included in the allowed NSSAI. , It may be new information generated by associating with the PLMN ID of one or more VPLMNs that support S-NSSAI, or it may be information generated by extending or changing allowed NSSAI. .. Specifically, in addition to the association between S-NSSAI and mapped S-NSSAI, it may be configured as an extended list of allowed NSSAI with PLMN IDs supporting these S-NSSAI as one set of information.
 また、例えば、第3の識別情報が登録受諾メッセージに含まれる場合は、AMFは、allowed NSSAIを含めなくてもよく、allowed NSSAIの代わりに第3の識別情報を含めてもよい。言い換えると、第3の識別情報を受信したUEは、第3の識別情報をallowed NSAAIを含む情報であると認識し、以降の各種処理に第3の識別情報に含まれる情報をallowed NSSAIとして用いてもよい。 Further, for example, when the third identification information is included in the registration acceptance message, the AMF may not include the allowed NSSAI, and may include the third identification information instead of the allowed NSSAI. In other words, the UE that receives the third identification information recognizes that the third identification information is information including allowed NSAAI, and uses the information included in the third identification information as allowed NSSAI in the subsequent various processes. You may.
 尚、AMFは、第2から4の識別情報の内、どの識別情報を制御メッセージに含めるかを、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、選択、決定してもよい。 In addition, AMF determines which identification information to be included in the control message among the second to fourth identification information, each received identification information and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and / or. Selections and decisions may be made based on operator policy and / or network status and / or user registration information and / or context held by AMF.
 また、AMFは、制御メッセージが登録受諾メッセージである場合、登録受諾メッセージにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を含めて送信するか、又は登録受諾メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を送信することができる。ただし、この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージの中にSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)が含められていた場合に、実行されてもよい。また、この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)が送信された場合に、実行されてもよい。AMFは、このような送信方法を行うことにより、登録手続きにおいて、SMのための手続きが受諾されたことを示すことができる。 Also, if the control message is a registration acceptance message, the AMF either sends the registration acceptance message with the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment acceptance message), or sends the SM message along with the registration acceptance message (eg, PDU session establishment). Acceptance message) can be sent. However, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message. Further, this transmission method may be executed when an SM message (for example, a PDU session establishment request message) is transmitted together with the registration request message. By performing such a transmission method, AMF can indicate that the procedure for SM has been accepted in the registration procedure.
 また、AMFは、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信することで、UEの要求が受諾されたことを示してもよいし、登録拒絶メッセージを送信することでUEの要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。 In addition, AMF also receives each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information and / or operator policy and / or network status and / or user registration information and / or It may be shown that the UE request has been accepted by sending the registration acceptance message based on the context held by the AMF, or the UE request has been rejected by sending the registration refusal message. May be indicated.
 UEは、5G AN(gNB)介して、制御メッセージを受信する(S608)。制御メッセージが登録受諾メッセージである場合、UEは、登録受諾メッセージを受信することで、登録要求メッセージによるUEの要求が受諾されたこと、及び登録受諾メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識することができる。または、制御メッセージが登録拒絶メッセージである場合、UEは、登録拒絶メッセージを受信することで、登録要求メッセージによるUEの要求が拒絶されたこと、及び登録拒絶メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識することができる。また、UEは、登録要求メッセージを送信した後、所定の期間が経過しても、制御メッセージを受信しない場合には、UEの要求が拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。 The UE receives the control message via 5GAN (gNB) (S608). When the control message is a registration acceptance message, the UE recognizes that the UE request by the registration request message has been accepted and the contents of various identification information contained in the registration acceptance message by receiving the registration acceptance message. can do. Alternatively, when the control message is a registration refusal message, the UE receives the registration refusal message, so that the UE's request by the registration request message is rejected, and the contents of various identification information included in the registration refusal message. Can be recognized. Further, the UE may recognize that the request of the UE has been rejected if the control message is not received even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after transmitting the registration request message.
 UEは、さらに、制御メッセージが登録受諾メッセージである場合、登録受諾メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして、登録完了メッセージを、5G AN(gNB)介して、AMFに送信することができる(S610)。尚、UEは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ等のSMメッセージを受信した場合は、登録完了メッセージに、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージ等のSMメッセージを含めて送信してもよいし、SMメッセージを含めることで、SMのための手続きが完了したことを示してもよい。ここで、登録完了メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであるが、UEと5G AN(gNB)間はRRCメッセージに含まれて送受信される。 The UE can further send a registration completion message to AMF via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the registration acceptance message when the control message is a registration acceptance message (S610). When the UE receives an SM message such as a PDU session establishment acceptance message, the UE may send the registration completion message including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate that the procedure for SM has been completed. Here, the registration completion message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
 AMFは、5G AN(gNB)介して、登録完了メッセージを受信する(S612)。また、各装置は、登録受諾メッセージ、及び/又は登録完了メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続きを完了する。 AMF receives a registration completion message via 5G AN (gNB) (S612). In addition, each device completes this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message.
 または、各装置は、登録拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づいて、登録手続きを完了してもよい。 Alternatively, each device may complete the registration procedure based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message.
 尚、各装置は、登録受諾メッセージ及び/又は登録完了メッセージの送受に基づいて、UEがネットワークに登録された状態(RM_REGISTERED state、又は5GMM-REGISTERED state)への遷移又は維持をしてもよいし、登録拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づいて、UEが現在のPLMNに対して登録拒絶メッセージを受信したアクセス上でネットワークに登録されていない状態(RM_DEREGISTERED state、又は5GMM-DEREGISTERED state)への遷移又は維持をしてもよい。また、各装置の各状態への遷移は、登録完了メッセージの送受信または登録手続きの完了に基づいて行われてもよい。 In addition, each device may transition or maintain the state in which the UE is registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state or 5GMM-REGISTERED state) based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message. , Transition or maintenance to the state where the UE is not registered in the network (RM_DEREGISTERED state, or 5GMM-DEREGISTERED state) on the access that received the registration refusal message to the current PLMN based on the transmission and reception of the registration refusal message. You may. Further, the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the transmission / reception of the registration completion message or the completion of the registration procedure.
 さらに、各装置は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録手続きで送受信した情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。例えば、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を送受信した場合、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を認識してもよい。さらに、各装置は、UEの要求が拒絶された理由に基づいて、再度本手続きを実施してもよいし、コアネットワーク_Aや別のセルに対して登録手続きを実施してもよい。 Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the information sent and received in the registration procedure based on the completion of the registration procedure. For example, when sending and receiving information indicating that a part of the UE's request has been rejected, the reason why the UE's request has been rejected may be recognized. Further, each device may perform this procedure again based on the reason why the UE request is rejected, or may perform the registration procedure for the core network_A or another cell.
 さらに、UEは、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージ、及び/又は登録拒絶メッセージとともに受信した識別情報を記憶してもよいし、ネットワークの決定を認識してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE may store the identification information received with the registration acceptance message and / or the registration refusal message based on the completion of the registration procedure, or may recognize the network decision.
 さらに、UEは、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、記憶する一又は複数のNSSAIを削除してもよい。具体的には、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づき、UE_A10が現在のPLMNに対して両アクセス(3GPPアクセスと非3GPPアクセス)上で非登録状態に遷移した場合、UE_A10は記憶する第1のrejected NSSAI及び/又は第3のrejected NSSAI及び/又は第1のNSSAIを削除してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE may delete one or more NSSAIs to be stored based on the completion of the registration procedure. Specifically, UE_A10 is the first to remember when UE_A10 transitions to the unregistered state on both accesses (3GPP access and non-3GPP access) to the current PLMN based on the completion of this procedure. The rejected NSSAI and / or the third rejected NSSAI and / or the first NSSAI may be deleted.
 更に、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づき、UE_A10が現在のPLMNに対してあるアクセス(3GPPアクセスと非3GPPアクセス)上で非登録状態に遷移した場合、又は、UE_A10が新しい登録エリアで登録手続きが成功した場合、又は、UE_A10が新しい登録エリアで登録手続きを実行した結果、あるアクセス上で非登録状態、または登録状態に遷移した場合、UE_A10は現在のPLMNと、現在の登録エリア、及び/又はそのアクセスタイプと、に関連付けられた第2のrejected NSSAIを削除してよい。 Furthermore, UE_A10 will be registered in the new registration area when UE_A10 transitions to the unregistered state on certain access (3GPP access and non-3GPP access) to the current PLMN based on the completion of this procedure. If successful, or if UE_A10 transitions to an unregistered or registered state on a given access as a result of performing a registration procedure in a new registration area, UE_A10 will have the current PLMN and the current registration area, and / Alternatively, the access type and the second rejected NSSAI associated with it may be deleted.
 さらに、各装置は、バックオフタイマの満了、または停止に基づき、再度登録手続きを開始してもよい。 Furthermore, each device may start the registration procedure again based on the expiration or stop of the backoff timer.
 さらに、各装置は、記憶するNSSAIの更新に基づき、再度登録手続きを開始してよい。 Furthermore, each device may start the registration procedure again based on the update of the stored NSSAI.
 さらに、各装置は、UEがネットワークに登録された状態(RM_REGISTERED state、又は5GMM-REGISTERED state)への遷移又は維持に基づき、SMメッセージの送受信により、SM手続きを開始してよい。 Furthermore, each device may start the SM procedure by sending and receiving SM messages based on the transition or maintenance of the UE registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state or 5GMM-REGISTERED state).
 [3.3. 更新手続き]
 次に更新手続きについて説明する。尚、本章において、更新手続きを本手続きとも称する。
[3.3. Update procedure]
Next, the renewal procedure will be described. In this chapter, the renewal procedure is also referred to as this procedure.
 更新手続きは、3.2章の登録手続きにおいて、UE_A10が受信した第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に基づき、UE_A10が記憶している情報(list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)を更新するためのネットワーク主導または、UE主導の手続きであってよい。具体的には、定期的又は任意のタイミングでの登録更新の為の登録手続き、及び/又は、UE設定更新手続き(Generic UE configuration update procedure)、及び/又は、ネットワーク主導のNAS transport手続き、及び/又は、UE主導のNAS transport手続きであってよい。 The update procedure updates the information (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations) stored by UE_A10 based on the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information received by UE_A10 in the registration procedure in Chapter 3.2. It may be a network-led or UE-led procedure for doing so. Specifically, registration procedures for renewal of registration at regular or arbitrary timings, and / or UE configuration update procedures, and / or network-led NAS transport procedures, and / Alternatively, it may be a UE-led NAS transport procedure.
 登録手続きによる本手続きは、3.2章で述べた手続きにおいて、新しい第3識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報をUE_A10がコアネットワークから受信し、UE_A10が既に受信し、記憶している第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に基づく情報(list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)を更新する手続きであってよい。 In this procedure by the registration procedure, in the procedure described in Chapter 3.2, the UE_A10 receives the new third identification information and / or the fourth identification information from the core network, and the UE_A10 has already received and stored the third identification information. It may be a procedure for updating the identification information and / or the information based on the fourth identification information (list of preferred PLMN / access technology combinations).
 ネットワーク主導又はUE主導のNAS transport手続きによる本手続きでは、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報の更新は、コアネットワークがDL NAS transport messageに第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を含めて、UE_A10に送信し、これらを受信したUE_A10が、既に受信し、記憶している第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に基づく情報(list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)を更新する手続きであってよい。 In this procedure by network-led or UE-led NAS transport procedure, the update of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information is performed by the core network in the DL NAS transport message of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. Information based on the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information (list of preferred PLMN / access technology) that is transmitted to UE_A10 including the identification information and received by UE_A10 that has already been received and stored. It may be a procedure to update combinations).
 尚、UEによる、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報の受信に基づく、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報の更新方法は、登録手続きと同じであってよい。 The method of updating the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information based on the reception of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information by the UE may be the same as the registration procedure.
 ここで、UE主導のNAS transport手続きは、UEがコアネットワークに対して、各情報を提供するための手続きであってよい。尚、提供される情報は、透過コンテナ情報要素があってもよい。さらに、前記透過コンテナ情報要素は、拡張された透過コンテナ情報要素であってもよい。 Here, the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure for the UE to provide each information to the core network. The information provided may include a transparent container information element. Further, the transparent container information element may be an extended transparent container information element.
 さらに、UE主導のNAS transport手続きは、UEがAMFに、UL NAS transport messageを送信することによって開始される手続きであってよい。さらに、UE主導のNAS transport手続きは、UEの状態変化や、UEの設定変更等がトリガとなって開始される手続きであってもよい。さらに、UE主導のNAS transport手続きは、上位層からの指示によって開始される手続きであってもよい。 Furthermore, the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure initiated by the UE sending a ULNAS transport message to the AMF. Further, the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure that is triggered by a change in the state of the UE, a change in the setting of the UE, or the like. Further, the UE-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure started by an instruction from a higher layer.
 さらに、ネットワーク主導のNAS transport手続きは、コアネットワークがUEに対して、各情報を提供するための手続きであってよい。尚、提供される情報は、透過コンテナ情報要素があってもよい。さらに、前記透過コンテナ情報要素は、拡張された透過コンテナ情報要素であってもよい。 Furthermore, the network-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure for the core network to provide each information to the UE. The information provided may include a transparent container information element. Further, the transparent container information element may be an extended transparent container information element.
 さらに、ネットワーク主導のNAS transport手続きは、AMFがUEに、DL NAS transport messageを送信することによって開始される手続きであってよい。さらに、ネットワーク主導のNAS transport手続きは、UL NAS transport messageの受信に基づいて開始される手続きであってもよい。逆に、ネットワーク主導のNAS transport手続きは、UL NAS transport messageの受信以外のトリガに基づいて開始される手続きであってもよい。例えば、ネットワーク主導のNAS transport手続きは、ネットワークの状態変化や、ネットワークの設定変更等がトリガとなって開始される手続きであってもよい。 Furthermore, the network-driven NAS transport procedure may be a procedure started by AMF sending a DLNAS transport message to the UE. Further, the network-driven NAS transport procedure may be a procedure started based on the reception of the ULNAS transport message. Conversely, the network-driven NAS transport procedure may be a procedure that is started based on a trigger other than the reception of the ULNAS transport message. For example, the network-led NAS transport procedure may be a procedure that is triggered by a change in network status, a change in network settings, or the like.
 UE設定更新手続きによる本手続きについては、次の3.3.1章において説明する。 This procedure by the UE setting update procedure will be explained in the next section 3.3.1.
 [3.3.1. UE設定更新手続き]
 次に、UE設定更新手続き(Generic UE configuration update procedure)について、図7を用いて説明する。以下、UE設定更新手続きは本手続きとも称する。本手続きは、コアネットワークが主導して、UEの設定情報を更新するための手続きである。本手続きは、ネットワークに登録されたUEに対してネットワークが主導して実行するモビリティマネジメントのための手続きであってよい。
[3.3.1. UE setting update procedure]
Next, the UE configuration update procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Hereinafter, the UE setting update procedure is also referred to as this procedure. This procedure is a procedure for updating the UE setting information under the initiative of the core network. This procedure may be a procedure for mobility management that the network takes the initiative to execute for the UE registered in the network.
 さらに、AMF等のコアネットワーク内の装置は、ネットワークの設定の更新、及び/又はオペレータポリシーの更新に基づいて本手続きを開始してもよい。尚、本手続きのトリガは、UEのモビリティの検出であってもよいし、UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク、及び/又はコアネットワークの状態変化の検出であってもよいし、ネットワークスライスの状態変化であってもよい。さらに、本手続きのトリガは、DN、及び/又はDNのアプリケーションサーバーからの要求の受信であってもよいし、ネットワークの設定の変化であってもよいし、オペレータポリシーの変化であってもよい。さらに、本手続きのトリガは、実行しているタイマの満了であってもよい。尚、コアネットワーク内の装置が本手続きを開始するトリガはこれらに限らない。言い換えると、本手続きは、前述の登録手続き及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きが完了した後の任意のタイミングで実行されてよい。さらに、本手続きは、各装置が5GMMコンテキストを確立した状態、及び/又は各装置が5GMM接続モードである状態であれば、任意のタイミングで実行されてよい。 Furthermore, devices in the core network such as AMF may start this procedure based on the update of network settings and / or the update of operator policy. The trigger of this procedure may be the detection of the mobility of the UE, the detection of the state change of the UE and / or the access network and / or the core network, or the state change of the network slice. It may be. Further, the trigger of this procedure may be the reception of a request from the DN and / or the application server of the DN, a change in network settings, or a change in operator policy. .. Further, the trigger of this procedure may be the expiration of the timer being executed. The triggers for the devices in the core network to start this procedure are not limited to these. In other words, this procedure may be executed at any time after the above-mentioned registration procedure and / or PDU session establishment procedure is completed. Further, this procedure may be executed at any timing as long as each device has established a 5GMM context and / or each device is in the 5GMM connection mode.
 また、各装置は、本手続き中に、UEの設定情報を変更するための識別情報、及び/又はUEが実行している機能を停止又は変更するための識別情報を含んだメッセージを送受信してもよい。さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、ネットワークが指示する設定に、設定情報を更新してもよいし、ネットワークが指示する挙動を開始してもよい。 In addition, each device sends and receives a message containing identification information for changing the setting information of the UE and / or identification information for stopping or changing the function executed by the UE during this procedure. May be good. Further, each device may update the setting information to the setting instructed by the network based on the completion of this procedure, or may start the behavior instructed by the network.
 UEは、本手続きによって送受信される制御情報を基に、UEの設定情報を更新してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定情報の更新に伴って、実行している機能を停止してもよいし、新たな機能を開始してもよい。言い換えると、コアネットワーク内の装置は、本手続きを主導すること、さらには本手続きの制御メッセージ及び制御情報をUEに送信することより、これらの制御情報を用いて識別可能なUEの設定情報を、UEに更新させてもよい。さらに、コアネットワーク内の装置は、UEの設定情報を更新させることで、UEが実行している機能を停止させてもよいし、UEに新たな機能を開始させてもよい。 The UE may update the setting information of the UE based on the control information transmitted and received by this procedure. Further, the UE may stop the function being executed or start a new function as the setting information of the UE is updated. In other words, the device in the core network leads this procedure, and further, by transmitting the control message and control information of this procedure to the UE, the UE setting information that can be identified by using these control information can be obtained. , UE may update. Further, the device in the core network may stop the function executed by the UE by updating the setting information of the UE, or may cause the UE to start a new function.
 まず、AMF140は、5G AN120(又はgNB)を介してUE_A10に、設定更新コマンド(Configuration update command)メッセージを送信することにより(S700)、UE設定更新手続きを開始する。 First, AMF140 starts the UE setting update procedure by sending a configuration update command message to UE_A10 via 5G AN120 (or gNB) (S700).
 AMF140は、設定更新コマンドメッセージに第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。ここで、設定更新コマンドメッセージに含まれる第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報は、UEが3.2章で述べた登録手続きにおける登録受諾メッセージに含めてAMFから受信し、記憶した第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を更新する新たな値であってよい。 The AMF140 may send the setting update command message including the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. Here, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information included in the setting update command message is included in the registration acceptance message in the registration procedure described in Chapter 3.2 by the UE, and is received and stored from the AMF. It may be a new value that updates the identification information and / or the fourth identification information of.
 尚、AMF140は、3.2章で述べた登録手続きにおいて、UEから第1の識別情報を含んだ登録要求メッセージを受信していない場合は、本手続きにおいて第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を送信してはならない。 If the AMF140 has not received the registration request message containing the first identification information from the UE in the registration procedure described in Chapter 3.2, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification in this procedure. Do not send information.
 また、AMF140は、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を設定更新コマンドメッセージに含めるかを、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMF140が保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、選択、決定してもよい。 In addition, the AMF140 also includes each identification information received, and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and whether to include the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information in the setting update command message. It may be selected and determined based on / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by the AMF140.
 また、AMF140は、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMF140が保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、設定更新コマンドメッセージを送信することで、UE_A10の設定情報の更新の要求を示してもよい。 In addition, AMF140 also receives each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information and / or operator policy and / or network status and / or user registration information and / or. A request for updating the setting information of UE_A10 may be indicated by sending a setting update command message based on the context held by the AMF140.
 UEは、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に基づき、UEが記憶する第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を更新してもよい。UEによる、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報の受信に基づく、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報の更新方法は、登録手続きと同じであってよい。 The UE may update the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information stored in the UE based on the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. The method of updating the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information based on the reception of the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information by the UE may be the same as the registration procedure.
 さらに、UEは、設定更新コマンドメッセージに含まれる識別情報に基づいて、設定更新コマンドメッセージに対する応答メッセージとして、設定更新完了(Configuration update complete)メッセージを、5G AN(gNB)を介して、AMF140に送信してもよい(S702)。 Further, the UE sends a configuration update complete message to the AMF140 via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the configuration update command message based on the identification information contained in the configuration update command message. May (S702).
 AMF140は、UE_A10が設定更新完了コマンドメッセージを送信した場合、5G AN(gNB)を介して、設定更新完了メッセージを受信する(S702)。また、各装置は、設定更新コマンドメッセージ、及び/又は設定更新完了メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続きを完了する。 When UE_A10 sends a setting update completion command message, AMF140 receives a setting update completion message via 5GAN (gNB) (S702). In addition, each device completes this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the setting update command message and / or the setting update completion message.
 さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、本手続きで送受信した情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。例えば、設定情報に対する更新情報を送受信した場合、各装置は、設定情報を更新してもよい。さらに、登録手続きの実行が必要であることを示す情報を送受信した場合、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、登録手続きを開始してもよい。 Furthermore, each device may perform processing based on the information transmitted and received in this procedure based on the completion of this procedure. For example, when the update information for the setting information is transmitted and received, each device may update the setting information. Furthermore, when sending and receiving information indicating that the registration procedure needs to be performed, UE_A10 may start the registration procedure based on the completion of this procedure.
 さらに、UE_A10は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、設定情報コマンドメッセージとともに受信した第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を記憶してもよいし、ネットワークの決定を認識してもよい。また、UEは本手続き完了に基づき、記憶した情報に基づいて、各手続きを実行してもよい。 Further, UE_A10 may store the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information received together with the setting information command message based on the completion of this procedure, and may recognize the network decision. .. In addition, the UE may execute each procedure based on the stored information based on the completion of this procedure.
 以上の手続きにおいて、設定更新コマンドメッセージの送受信により、コアネットワーク内の装置は、UEに対して、UEが既に記憶又は適用している設定情報の更新を指示することができるし、UEが実行している機能の停止又は変更を指示することができる。 In the above procedure, by sending and receiving the setting update command message, the device in the core network can instruct the UE to update the setting information already stored or applied by the UE, and the UE executes the command. You can instruct to stop or change the function you are using.
 [3.4. PLMN選択]
 次にPLMN選択に関する処理について説明する。
[3.4. PLMN selection]
Next, the process related to PLMN selection will be described.
 PLMN選択は、UE_A10が、移動(モビリティ)によって現在登録及び/又は接続しているPLMN(ここではHPLMN)から他のPLMN(VPLMN)への切り替えが必要となった場合、又はHPLMN以外のエリアで電源投入を行った場合にUEが実行する処理であってよい。 PLMN selection is when UE_A10 needs to switch from the currently registered and / or connected PLMN (here HPLMN) to another PLMN (VPLMN) due to movement (mobility), or in an area other than HPLMN. It may be a process executed by the UE when the power is turned on.
 また、PLMN選択は、UE_A10が登録手続き及び/又は更新手続きで受信し、記憶した第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に基づいて行ってよく、UE_A10がHPLMNで使用していた特定のS-NSSAIをサポートするPLMN (VPLMN) ID及び/又はアクセス技術及び/又はPLMNがサポートするNSSAI(S-NSSAI(s))の組み合わせを選択するUEの処理であってよい。 Also, the PLMN selection may be based on the third and / or fourth identification information received and stored by the UE_A10 in the registration and / or renewal procedures, and the identification used by the UE_A10 in the HPLMN. It may be a UE process that selects a combination of PLMN (VPLMN) ID and / or access technology that supports S-NSSAI and / or NSSAI (S-NSSAI (s)) that supports PLMN.
 ここで、例えば、第3の識別情報が拡張されたSOR透過コンテナ情報要素であった場合、PLMN選択は、自動で行う自動モード(Automatic mode)で実行してもよいし、UE_A10が示す利用可能なPLMNに基づき、の使用者が手動で行う手動モード(Manual mode)で実行してもよい。ここで、AutomaticモードによるPLMN選択は、PLMN ID及びアクセス技術及び/又はNSSAI(1以上のS-NSSAI)の組み合わせから最も優先順位が高い組み合わせを選択し、次に実行する登録手続きにおいて、使用してもよい。ここで、優先順位は、PLMN及びアクセス技術及び/又はNSSAI(1以上のS-NSSAI)の組み合わせが格納されている順番であってよく、最初に格納されているPLMN ID及びアクセス技術及び/又はNSSAI(1以上のS-NSSAI)の組み合わせに含まれるPLMN IDの優先順位が最も高くてよい。 Here, for example, when the third identification information is an extended SOR transparent container information element, the PLMN selection may be executed in the automatic mode (Automatic mode), which is automatically performed, or can be used as indicated by UE_A10. It may be executed in the manual mode (Manual mode) manually performed by the user based on the PLMN. Here, PLMN selection by Automatic mode is used in the registration procedure to be executed next by selecting the combination with the highest priority from the combination of PLMN ID and access technology and / or NSSAI (1 or more S-NSSAI). You may. Here, the priority may be the order in which the combination of PLMN and access technology and / or NSSAI (one or more S-NSSAI) is stored, and the first stored PLMN ID and access technology and / or The PLMN ID included in the combination of NSSAI (1 or more S-NSSAI) may have the highest priority.
 また、例えば、第3の識別情報が拡張されたallowed NSSAIであった場合のPLMN選択は、UEがPLMN選択に基づき登録手続きを実行した後に、PDUセッションを確立するS-NSSAIに基づいて、PLMNを選択するUEの処理であってよい。 Also, for example, when the third identification information is an extended allowed NSSAI, the PLMN selection is based on the S-NSSAI that establishes a PDU session after the UE executes the registration procedure based on the PLMN selection. It may be the processing of the UE that selects.
 また、HPLMN以外のエリアで電源投入を行った場合に実行されるPLMN選択は、UEが既に受信し、記憶している第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報及び/又はこれらに含まれる情報に基づいて実行してもよい。 Also, the PLMN selection executed when the power is turned on in an area other than the HPLMN is included in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information and / or these that the UE has already received and stored. It may be executed based on the information obtained.
 尚、ここで、UEがHPLMNで接続し、使用していた1以上のS-NSSAIをサポートするPLMN IDが、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に、含まれていなかった場合、UEは、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報から最も優先度の高い(highest priority) PLMN IDを選択し、選択したPLMN IDに基づいて登録手続きを実行してもよいし、PLMN IDを選択せず、前記以外のネットワークが許可したNSSAI(allowed NSSAI)に基づいて登録手続きを実行してもよく、UEの動作はこれらに限らない。 Here, when the PLMN ID supporting one or more S-NSSAIs used by the UE connected by HPLMN is not included in the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. , The UE may select the highest priority PLMN ID from the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information, and execute the registration procedure based on the selected PLMN ID. The registration procedure may be executed based on NSSAI (allowed NSSAI) permitted by networks other than the above without selecting the PLMN ID, and the operation of the UE is not limited to these.
 また、PLMN選択実行後のUEは、PLMN選択に基づいて、選択し、決定した接続先のPLMNへの登録手続きを実行してよい。ここで、この登録手続きは、モビリティによって実行される登録手続きであってもよいし、初期登録手続きであってもよい。 Further, the UE after executing the PLMN selection may execute the registration procedure to the PLMN of the connection destination selected and determined based on the PLMN selection. Here, this registration procedure may be a registration procedure executed by mobility or an initial registration procedure.
 [4.本発明の一態様における実施形態]
 本発明の一態様における実施形態は、3章で説明した1以上の手続きの組み合わせであってよい。例えば、本実施形態では、図8に示すように、3章で説明した登録手続き(S800)の完了後に、ネットワーク又はUEが主導する更新手続き(S802)を実行してもよいし、実行しなくてもよい。
[4. Embodiment in one aspect of the present invention]
An embodiment of one aspect of the invention may be a combination of one or more procedures described in Chapter 3. For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, after the registration procedure (S800) described in Chapter 3 is completed, the network or UE-led update procedure (S802) may or may not be executed. You may.
 ここで、更新手続きは、UE又はネットワークが任意のタイミングで開始してもよいし、UE又はネットワークにおける設定又はポリシーの変更に基づいて実行されてもよいし、ネットワークが記憶するUEサブスクリプション情報または、他のネットワーク(PLMN)とのローミング合意の変更、又は他のネットワークのスライスサポートに基づいて実行されてもよい。 Here, the renewal procedure may be started at any time by the UE or the network, may be executed based on a setting or policy change in the UE or the network, or the UE subscription information or the UE subscription information stored by the network. , May be implemented based on changes in roaming agreements with other networks (PLMN), or slice support for other networks.
 これらの手続き(S800及び/又はS802)の完了に基づいて、UE及び/又はコアネットワークの各装置は、第1の状態(S804)に遷移してもよい。 Based on the completion of these procedures (S800 and / or S802), each device in the UE and / or core network may transition to the first state (S804).
 ここで、第1の状態(S804)は、UE_A10及びコアネットワーク各装置が登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)であってよく、及び/又は、登録手続き(S800)及び/又は更新手続き(S804)において、UE_A10が第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報を受信し、記憶している状態であってよい。さらに、第1の状態(S804)は、UE_A10が第2の識別情報を受信した状態であってもよい。 Here, in the first state (S804), the UE_A10 and each core network device may be in the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state), and / or in the registration procedure (S800) and / or the renewal procedure (S804). , UE_A10 may be in a state of receiving and storing the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information. Further, the first state (S804) may be a state in which UE_A10 has received the second identification information.
 尚、第3の識別情報は、拡張されたSOR透過コンテナ情報要素及び/又は拡張されたallowed NSSAIであってよく、初期登録手続きにおいて、UE_A10がコアネットワークに送信した第1の識別情報に基づいていてもよい。 The third identification information may be an extended SOR transparent container information element and / or an extended allowed NSSAI, and is based on the first identification information transmitted by UE_A10 to the core network in the initial registration procedure. You may.
 次に第1の状態のUE_A10は、移動(モビリティ)によって他のPLMNへの切り替えが必要、又は、HPLMN以外のエリアで電源投入を行った場合、PLMN選択(S806)を行ってもよい。PLMN選択は、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に基づいて行ってよく、UE_A10がHPLMNで使用していた特定のS-NSSAIをサポートするPLMN (VPLMN) IDを自動で実施してもよいし、又は、UE_A10の使用者により手動で実施してもよい。 Next, UE_A10 in the first state may select PLMN (S806) when it is necessary to switch to another PLMN due to movement (mobility) or when the power is turned on in an area other than HPLMN. The PLMN selection may be based on the third and / or fourth identification information, which automatically implements the PLMN (VPLMN) ID that supports the specific S-NSSAI used by the UE_A10 on the HPLMN. It may be carried out manually by the user of UE_A10.
 尚、複数の第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報に2以上のPLMN IDが含まれている場合は、優先順位等に基づいて、上位のPLMN IDを選択してもよい。ここで、優先順位は、PLMN ID及びアクセス技術及び/又は1以上のS-NSSAIの組み合わせが格納されている順番であってよく、最初に格納されているPLMN ID及びアクセス技術及び/又は1以上のS-NSSAIの組み合わせの優先順位が最も高くてよい。 If two or more PLMN IDs are included in the plurality of third identification information and / or the fourth identification information, a higher PLMN ID may be selected based on the priority or the like. Here, the priority may be the order in which the PLMN ID and access technology and / or the combination of one or more S-NSSAIs are stored, and the first stored PLMN ID and access technology and / or one or more are stored. The S-NSSAI combination may have the highest priority.
 次に、PLMN選択に基づいて接続先のPLMN IDを選択し、決定したUE_A10は、選択し、決定した接続先PLMNへの登録手続きを実行(S808)してよく、この登録手続きは、モビリティによって実行される登録手続きであってもよいし、初期登録手続きであってもよい。また、VPLM(図8のPLMN #2)への登録手続きは、3章で述べた登録手続きと同等であってよいし、登録要求メッセージに第1の識別情報を含めない登録手続きであってもよい。 Next, the PLMN ID of the connection destination is selected based on the PLMN selection, and the determined UE_A10 may execute the registration procedure (S808) for the selected and determined connection destination PLMN, and this registration procedure is performed by mobility. It may be a registration procedure to be executed, or it may be an initial registration procedure. In addition, the registration procedure for VPLM (PLMN # 2 in Fig. 8) may be the same as the registration procedure described in Chapter 3, or even if the registration request message does not include the first identification information. good.
 また、これまで、第3の識別情報及び/又は第4の識別情報は、UE_A10がHPLMNにおいて、登録手続き及び/又は更新手続きによって受信及び/又は更新する実施形態を説明した。しかし、これに限らず、VPLMNにおいても同様に、登録手続き及び/又は更新手続きによって第3及び/又は第4の識別情報を受信及び/又は更新してもよい。 Also, so far, the third identification information and / or the fourth identification information has described an embodiment in which UE_A10 receives and / or updates at HPLMN by a registration procedure and / or an update procedure. However, not limited to this, the VPLMN may also receive and / or update the third and / or fourth identification information by the registration procedure and / or the renewal procedure.
 [5. 変形例]
 本発明に関わる装置で動作するプログラムは、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現するように、Central Processing Unit(CPU)等を制御してコンピュータを機能させるプログラムであってもよい。プログラムあるいはプログラムによって取り扱われる情報は、一時的にRandom Access Memory(RAM)等の揮発性メモリあるいはフラッシュメモリ等の不揮発性メモリやHard Disk Drive(HDD)、あるいはその他の記憶装置システムに格納される。
[5. Modification example]
The program that operates in the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls the Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate the computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention. The program or information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
 尚、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現する為のプログラムをコンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録してもよい。この記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行する事によって実現してもよい。ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、装置に内蔵されたコンピュータシステムであって、オペレーティングシステムや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。また、「コンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、半導体記録媒体、光記録媒体、磁気記録媒体、短時間動的にプログラムを保持する媒体、あるいはコンピュータが読み取り可能なその他の記録媒体であってもよい。 Note that the program for realizing the function of the embodiment according to the present invention may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by loading the program recorded on this recording medium into a computer system and executing it. The "computer system" as used herein is a computer system built into a device, and includes hardware such as an operating system and peripheral devices. The "computer-readable recording medium" is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another recording medium that can be read by a computer. May be good.
 また、上述した実施形態に用いた装置の各機能ブロック、または諸特徴は、電気回路、たとえば、集積回路あるいは複数の集積回路で実装または実行され得る。本明細書で述べられた機能を実行するように設計された電気回路は、汎用用途プロセッサ、デジタルシグナルプロセッサ(DSP)、特定用途向け集積回路(ASIC)、フィールドプログラマブルゲートアレイ(FPGA)、またはその他のプログラマブル論理デバイス、ディスクリートゲートまたはトランジスタロジック、ディスクリートハードウェア部品、またはこれらを組み合わせたものを含んでよい。汎用用途プロセッサは、マイクロプロセッサでもよいし、従来型のプロセッサ、コントローラ、マイクロコントローラ、またはステートマシンであってもよい。前述した電気回路は、デジタル回路で構成されていてもよいし、アナログ回路で構成されていてもよい。また、半導体技術の進歩により現在の集積回路に代替する集積回路化の技術が出現した場合、本発明の一又は複数の態様は当該技術による新たな集積回路を用いる事も可能である。 Further, each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiment can be implemented or executed in an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits. Electrical circuits designed to perform the functions described herein are general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or others. Programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or a combination thereof. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller, or a state machine. The electric circuit described above may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit appears due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or a plurality of aspects of the present invention can use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
 なお、本願発明は上述の実施形態に限定されるものではない。実施形態では、装置の1例を記載したが、本願発明は、これに限定されるものではなく、屋内外に設置される据え置き型、または非可動型の電子機器、たとえば、AV機器、キッチン機器、掃除・洗濯機器、空調機器、オフィス機器、自動販売機、その他生活機器等の端末装置もしくは通信装置に適用出来る。 The invention of the present application is not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the embodiment, an example of the device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, for example, an AV device or a kitchen device. It can be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as cleaning / washing equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other living equipment.
 以上、この発明の実施形態に関して図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、この発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計変更等も含まれる。また、本発明は、請求項に示した範囲で種々の変更が可能であり、異なる実施形態にそれぞれ開示された技術的手段を適宜組み合わせて得られる実施形態についても本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。また、上記各実施形態に記載された要素であり、同様の効果を奏する要素同士を置換した構成も含まれる。 As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and includes design changes and the like within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Further, the present invention can be variously modified within the scope of the claims, and the technical scope of the present invention also includes embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in the different embodiments. Is done. In addition, the elements described in each of the above embodiments include a configuration in which elements having the same effect are replaced with each other.

Claims (1)

  1.  UE(User Equipment)であって、
     送受信部と、制御部と、記憶部とを備え、
      前記送受信部は、第1のPLMN(Public Land Mobile Networks)において、前記第1のPLMNで使用を許可された第1のS-NSSAI(Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information)と、前記第1のS-NSSAIと関連付けられた第2のPLMNを示す第2のPLMN IDとを含む登録受諾メッセージをコアネットワークから受信し、
      前記記憶部は、前記第2のPLMN IDと前記第1のS-NSSAIとを関連付けて記憶し、
      前記制御部は、前記第1のS-NSSAIに関連付けられた前記第2のPLMN IDに基づいて、前記第2のPLMNを選択可能であり、
      前記制御部は、前記登録受諾メッセージの受信に基づき、登録状態に遷移し、
      前記送受信部は、前記登録受諾メッセージを受信した後、前記第1のPLMNにおいて、前記第1のPLMNで使用を許可された第1のS-NSSAIと、前記第1のS-NSSAIと関連付けられた第3のPLMNを示す第3のPLMN IDとを含む設定更新コマンドを受信したときは、
      前記記憶部は、前記第3のPLMN IDと前記第1のS-NSSAIとを関連付けて記憶し、
      前記制御部は、前記第1のS-NSSAIに関連付けられた前記第3のPLMN IDに基づいて、前記第3のPLMNを選択する、
     ことを特徴とするUE。
    UE (User Equipment)
    It is equipped with a transmission / reception unit, a control unit, and a storage unit.
    The transmitter / receiver is the first PLMN (Public Land Mobile Networks), the first S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) permitted to be used in the first PLMN, and the first S-. Receive a registration acceptance message from the core network that includes a second PLMN ID that indicates the second PLMN associated with the NSSAI.
    The storage unit stores the second PLMN ID and the first S-NSSAI in association with each other.
    The control unit can select the second PLMN based on the second PLMN ID associated with the first S-NSSAI.
    The control unit transitions to the registration state based on the reception of the registration acceptance message, and then changes to the registration state.
    After receiving the registration acceptance message, the transmission / reception unit is associated with the first S-NSSAI permitted to be used in the first PLMN and the first S-NSSAI in the first PLMN. When a configuration update command containing a third PLMN ID indicating the third PLMN is received,
    The storage unit stores the third PLMN ID and the first S-NSSAI in association with each other.
    The control unit selects the third PLMN based on the third PLMN ID associated with the first S-NSSAI.
    UE characterized by that.
PCT/JP2021/014443 2020-04-24 2021-04-05 Ue (user equipment) WO2021215227A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022516932A JPWO2021215227A1 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-05

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020-077041 2020-04-24
JP2020077041 2020-04-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021215227A1 true WO2021215227A1 (en) 2021-10-28

Family

ID=78269128

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/014443 WO2021215227A1 (en) 2020-04-24 2021-04-05 Ue (user equipment)

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2021215227A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2021215227A1 (en)

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020074542A1 (en) * 2018-10-09 2020-04-16 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Configured nssai for other plmns

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020074542A1 (en) * 2018-10-09 2020-04-16 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Configured nssai for other plmns

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SAMSUNG: "Correction of network slicing subscription change", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-1907280 501_R16 CR1546 SLICE SUBSCRIPTION CHANGE INDICATION, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. SA WG2, no. Sapporo, Japan; 20190624 - 20190628, 17 June 2019 (2019-06-17), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051752245 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2021215227A1 (en) 2021-10-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021132505A1 (en) User equipment (ue)
WO2021205955A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication method for ue
WO2021215228A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and access and mobility management function (amf)
WO2021241114A1 (en) User equipment (ue), core network device, access and mobility management function (amf), and session management function (smf)
WO2021060383A1 (en) User device and core network device
WO2022097703A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication control method performed by ue
WO2021132288A1 (en) User Equipment (UE)
WO2023013276A1 (en) User equipment (ue)
WO2022004699A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication control method for ue
WO2021132502A1 (en) Ue, control device, and communication control method
JP2021166360A (en) UE (User Equipment)
WO2021215227A1 (en) Ue (user equipment)
WO2022004700A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication method for ue
WO2021132287A1 (en) User Equipment (UE)
WO2022030473A1 (en) User equipment (ue)
WO2022097701A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication control method performed by ue
WO2022097702A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication control method executed by ue
WO2022030474A1 (en) Ue (user equipment)
WO2022154062A1 (en) User equipment (ue)
WO2022154063A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication control method
WO2023248883A1 (en) User equipment (ue)
WO2022154064A1 (en) User equipment (ue) and communication control method
WO2023248884A1 (en) User equipment (ue)
WO2023127744A1 (en) Ue (user equipment) and communication control method executed using ue
WO2023127745A1 (en) Ue (user equipment) and communication control method executed by ue

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21793709

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022516932

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21793709

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1